VFD - VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 - Design Guide - Doc - MG20Z102

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
Design Guide
VLT®AQUA Drive FC 202 110-1400 kW
Contents VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
Contents
1 How to Read this Design Guide 7
2 Introduction 12
2.1 Safety 12
2.2 Software Version 13
2.3 CE Labelling 13
2.4 Air Humidity 14
2.5 Aggressive Environments 14
2.6 Vibration and Shock 15
2.7 Frequency Converter Benefits 15
2.8 Control Structures 18
2.8.1 Control Principle 18
2.8.2 Control Structure Open Loop 22
2.8.3 Local (Hand On) and Remote (Auto On) Control 22
2.8.4 Control Structure Closed Loop 23
2.8.5 Feedback Handling 24
2.8.6 Feedback Conversion 25
2.8.7 Reference Handling 26
2.8.8 Example of Closed Loop PID Control 27
2.8.9 Programming Order 28
2.8.10 Tuning the Closed Loop Controller 29
2.8.11 Manual PID Adjustment 29
2.9 General Aspects of EMC 30
2.9.1 General Aspects of EMC Emissions 30
2.9.2 Emission Requirements 31
2.9.3 EMC Test Results (Emission) 32
2.9.4 General Aspects of Harmonics Emission 32
2.9.5 Harmonics Emission Requirements 33
2.9.6 Harmonics Test Results (Emission) 33
2.10 Immunity Requirements 33
2.11 Galvanic Isolation (PELV) 34
2.12 Earth Leakage Current 35
2.13 Control with Brake Function 36
2.14 Mechanical Brake Control 37
2.15 Extreme Running Conditions 37
2.15.1 Motor Thermal Protection 37
2.15.2 Safe Stop Operation (optional) 39
3 Selection 40
3.1 General Specifications 40
MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

3.1.1 Mains Supply 3x380-480 V AC 40

3.1.2 Mains Supply 3x525-690 V AC 42
3.1.3 12-Pulse Specifications 45
3.2 Efficiency 51
3.3 Acoustic Noise 51
3.4 Peak Voltage on Motor 52
3.5 Special Conditions 52
3.5.1 Purpose of Derating 52
3.5.2 Derating for Low Air Pressure 52
3.5.3 Derating for Running at Low Speed 53
3.5.4 Automatic Adaptations to Ensure Performance 54
3.5.5 Derating for Ambient Temperature 54
3.6 Options and Accessories 56
3.6.1 General Purpose Input Output Module MCB 101 56
3.6.2 Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4 57
3.6.3 Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12 57
3.6.4 Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7 57
3.6.5 Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8 57
3.6.6 Relay Option MCB 105 58
3.6.7 24 V Back-Up Option MCB 107 (Option D) 59
3.6.8 Analog I/O option MCB 109 59
3.6.9 General Description 61
3.6.10 Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101 62
3.6.11 Brake Resistors 62
3.6.12 Remote Mounting Kit for LCP 63
3.6.13 Input Filters 63
3.6.14 Output Filters 63
3.7 High Power Options 64
3.7.1 Installation of Back Channel Cooling Kit in Rittal Enclosures 64
3.7.2 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for Rittal Enclosures 66
3.7.3 Installation on Pedestal 66
3.7.4 Installation of Input Plate Options 68
3.7.5 Installation of Mains Shield for Frequency Converters 68
3.7.6 D-frame Options 68
3.7.6.1 Load Share Terminals 68
3.7.6.2 Regeneration Terminals 68
3.7.6.3 Anti-Condensation Heater 69
3.7.6.4 Brake Chopper 69
3.7.6.5 Mains Shield 69
3.7.6.6 Ruggedized Printed Circuit Boards 69
2 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

3.7.6.7 Heat Sink Access Panel 69

3.7.6.8 Mains Disconnect 69
3.7.6.9 Contactor 69
3.7.6.10 Circuit Breaker 69
3.7.7 Frame Size F Options 69
4 How to Order 72
4.1 Ordering Form 72
4.1.1 Drive Configurator 72
4.1.2 Type Code String 73
4.2 Ordering Numbers 77
4.2.1 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories 77
4.2.2 Ordering Numbers: Advanced Harmonic Filters 78
4.2.3 Ordering Numbers: Sine-Wave Filter Modules, 380–690 V AC 83
4.2.4 Ordering Numbers: dU/dt Filters 85
4.2.5 Ordering Numbers: Brake Resistors 86
5 How to Install 87
5.1 Mechanical Installation 87
5.1.1 Mechanical Mounting 90
5.1.2 Pedestal Installation of D-Frames 90
5.1.3 Pedestal Installation on F-Frame Drives 91
5.1.4 Safety Requirements of Mechanical Installation 91
5.2 Pre-installation 91
5.2.1 Planning the Installation Site 91
5.2.2 Receiving the Frequency Converter 92
5.2.3 Transportation and Unpacking 92
5.2.4 Lifting 92
5.2.5 Tools Needed 93
5.2.6 General Considerations 94
5.2.7 Cooling and Airflow 96
5.2.8 Gland/Conduit Entry - IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA12) 98
5.2.9 Gland/Conduit Entry, 12-Pulse - IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA12) 99
5.3 Electrical Installation 100
5.3.1 Cables General 100
5.3.2 Preparing Gland Plates for Cables 100
5.3.3 Connection to Mains and Earthing 101
5.3.4 Motor Cable Connection 101
5.3.5 Motor Cables 102
5.3.6 Electrical Installation of Motor Cables 102
5.3.7 Fuses 103

5.3.8 Fuse Specifications 103

5.3.9 Access to Control Terminals 105
5.3.10 Control Terminals 105
5.3.11 Control Cable Terminals 105
5.3.12 Basic Wiring Example 106
5.3.13 Control Cable Length 107
5.3.14 Electrical Installation, Control Cables 107
5.3.15 12-Pulse Control Cables 110
5.3.16 Switches S201, S202 and S801 112
5.4 Connections - Frame Sizes D, E and F 113
5.4.1 Torque 113
5.4.2 Power Connections 114
5.4.3 Power Connections 12-Pulse Drives 134
5.4.4 Shielding against Electrical Noise 144
5.4.5 External Fan Power Supply 144
5.5 Input Options 145
5.5.1 Mains Disconnects 145
5.5.2 Mains Contactors 146
5.5.3 Relay Output D frame 147
5.5.4 Relay Output E & F-Frame 147
5.6 Final Set-Up and Test 147
5.7 Safe Stop Installation 148
5.7.1 Safe Stop Commissioning Test 149
5.8 Installation of Miscellaneous Connections 149
5.8.1 RS-485 Bus Connection 149
5.8.2 How to Connect a PC to the Unit 150
5.8.3 PC Software Tools 150
5.8.3.1 MCT 10 150
5.8.3.2 MCT 31 151
5.9 Safety 151
5.9.1 High Voltage Test 151
5.9.2 Safety Earth Connection 151
5.10 EMC-correct Installation 151
5.10.1 Electrical Installation - EMC Precautions 151
5.10.2 Use of EMC-Correct Cables 153
5.10.3 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables 153
5.11 Residual Current Device 155
6 Application Examples 156

6.1 Typical Application Examples 156
6.1.1 Start/Stop 156

6.1.2 Pulse Start/Stop 156

6.1.3 Potentiometer Reference 157
6.1.4 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 157
6.1.5 Smart Logic Control 157
6.1.6 Smart Logic Control Programming 158
6.1.7 SLC Application Example 158
6.1.8 BASIC Cascade Controller 160
6.1.9 Pump Staging with Lead Pump Alternation 161
6.1.10 System Status and Operation 161
6.1.11 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram 162
6.1.12 Fixed Variable Speed Pump Wiring Diagram 163
6.1.13 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram 163
7 RS-485 Installation and Set-up 165

7.1 Introduction 165
7.1.1 Hardware Setup 165
7.1.2 Parameter Settings for Modbus Communication 165
7.1.3 EMC Precautions 165
7.2 FC Protocol Overview 166
7.3 Network Connection 166
7.4 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure 167
7.4.1 Content of a Character (byte) 167
7.4.2 Telegram Structure 167
7.4.3 Telegram Length (LGE) 167
7.4.4 Frequency Converter Address (ADR) 167
7.4.5 Data Control Byte (BCC) 167
7.4.6 The Data Field 168
7.4.7 The PKE Field 168
7.4.8 Parameter Number (PNU) 169
7.4.9 Index (IND) 169
7.4.10 Parameter Value (PWE) 169
7.4.11 Data Types Supported 170
7.4.12 Conversion 170
7.4.13 Process Words (PCD) 170
7.5 Examples 170
7.5.1 Writing a Parameter Value 170
7.5.2 Reading a Parameter Value 171
7.6 Modbus RTU Overview 171
7.6.1 Assumptions 171
7.6.2 Prerequisite Knowledge 171
7.6.3 Modbus RTU Overview 171

7.6.4 Frequency Converter with Modbus RTU 172

7.7 Network Configuration 172
7.8 Modbus RTU Message Framing Structure 172
7.8.2 Modbus RTU Message Structure 172
7.8.3 Start/Stop Field 173
7.8.4 Address Field 173
7.8.5 Function Field 173
7.8.6 Data Field 173
7.8.7 CRC Check Field 173
7.8.8 Coil Register Addressing 174
7.8.9 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU 175
7.9 How to Access Parameters 177
7.9.1 Parameter Handling 177
7.9.2 Storage of Data 177
7.9.3 IND 177
7.9.4 Text Blocks 177
7.9.5 Conversion Factor 177
7.9.6 Parameter Values 177
7.10 Examples 177
7.10.1 Read Coil Status (01 HEX) 177
7.10.2 Force/Write Single Coil (05 HEX) 178
7.10.3 Force/Write Multiple Coils (0F HEX) 178
7.10.4 Read Holding Registers (03 HEX) 178
7.10.5 Preset Single Register (06 HEX) 179
7.11 Danfoss FC Control Profile 179
7.11.1 Control Word According to FC Profile (8-10 Control Profile=FC profile) 179
7.11.2 Status Word According to FC Profile (STW) (8-10 Control Profile = FC profile) 181
7.11.3 Bus Speed Reference Value 183
8 Troubleshooting 184
8.1 Status Messages 184
Index 188

How to Read this Design Gui... VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
1 How to Read this Design Guide 1 1
1.1.1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and getting the HP frequency converter up and
Revision Rights running.
- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202, 110-1400 kW, Design
This publication contains information proprietary to Guide provides all technical information about
Danfoss. By accepting and using this manual, the user the frame D, E, and F frequency converter and
agrees to use the information contained herein solely for customer design and applications.
operating equipment from Danfoss or equipment from
other vendors if such equipment is intended for communi- - VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Programming Guide
cation with Danfoss equipment over a serial provides information on how to programme and
communication link. This publication is protected under includes complete parameter descriptions.
the Copyright laws of Denmark and most other countries. - VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Profibus.
- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 DeviceNet.
Danfoss does not warrant that a software program
produced according to the guidelines provided in this - Output Filters Design Guide.
manual functions properly in every physical, hardware, or - VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Cascade Controller.
software environment.
- Application Note: Submersible Pump Application
Although Danfoss has tested and reviewed the documen- - Application Note: Master/Follower Operation
tation within this manual, Danfoss makes no warranty or Application
representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect - Application Note: Drive Closed Loop and Sleep
to this documentation, including its quality, performance, Mode
or fitness for a particular purpose.
- Instruction: Analog I/O Option MCB109
In no event shall Danfoss be liable for direct, indirect, - Instruction: Panel through mount kit
special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of - VLT® Active Filter Operating Instruction.
the use, or the inability to use information contained in
this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such Danfoss technical literature is also available online at
damages. In particular, Danfoss is not responsible for any www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/
costs, including but not limited to costs incurred as a Documentations/Technical+Documentation.htm.
result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage of Symbols
equipment, loss of computer programs, loss of data, the The following symbols are used in this manual.
costs to substitute these losses, or any claims by third
parties. WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
Danfoss reserves the right to revise this publication at any result in death or serious injury.
time and to change its contents without prior notice or
any obligation to notify former or present users of such
revisions or changes.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result
in minor or moderate injury. It can also be used to alert
1.1.2 Available Literature against unsafe practices.
- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202, 0.25-90 kW, Operating

Instructions provide the necessary information for CAUTION
getting the frequency converter up and running. Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202, 110-400 kW, D frame property-damage-only accidents.
Operating Instructions provide installation,
startup, and basic information for the newest D- NOTE
frame models. Indicates highlighted information to regard with attention
- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 High Power Operating to avoid mistakes or operate equipment at less than
Instructions provide the necessary information for optimal performance.

1 1 1.1.4 Definitions
Frequency converter:
IVLT,MAX
The maximum output current.
IVLT,N
Table 1.1 Approvals The rated output current supplied by the frequency
converter.
1.1.3 Abbreviations UVLT, MAX
The maximum output voltage.
Alternating current AC
Input:
American wire gauge AWG
Control command
Ampere/AMP A
Stop the connected motor with LCP and the digital inputs.
Automatic Motor Adaptation AMA
Functions are divided into two groups.
Current limit ILIM Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
Degrees Celsius °C group 2.
Direct current DC
Drive Dependent D-TYPE Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop, Quick-
Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC stop, DC braking, Stop and the "Off" key.
Electronic Thermal Relay ETR Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog, and
Frequency converter FC Freeze output
Gram g
Hertz Hz Table 1.3 Control Command
Horsepower hp
Kilohertz kHz
Motor:
fJOG
Local Control Panel LCP
The motor frequency when the jog function is activated
Meter m
(via digital terminals).
Millihenry Inductance mH
Milliampere mA fM
Millisecond ms The motor frequency.
Minute min fMAX
Motion Control Tool MCT The maximum motor frequency.
Nanofarad nF
fMIN
Newton Meters Nm The minimum motor frequency.
Nominal motor current IM,N
fM,N
Nominal motor frequency fM,N
The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
Nominal motor power PM,N
Nominal motor voltage UM,N IM
Permanent Magnet motor PM motor The motor current.
Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV IM,N
Printed Circuit Board PCB The rated motor current (nameplate data).
Rated Inverter Output Current IINV nM,N
Revolutions Per Minute RPM The rated motor speed (nameplate data).
Regenerative terminals Regen
PM,N
Second sec.
The rated motor power (nameplate data).
Synchronous Motor Speed ns
Torque limit TLIM TM,N
Volts V The rated torque (motor).
The maximum output current IVLT,MAX UM
The rated output current supplied by the IVLT,N The instantaneous motor voltage.
frequency converter UM,N
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Table 1.2 Abbreviations

ηVLT Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA 1 1

The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for
ratio between the power output and the power input. the connected motor at standstill.
Start-disable command Brake Resistor

A stop command belonging to the group 1 control The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
commands - see this group. brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative braking power increases the intermediate
Stop command circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
See Control Command. power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
References: CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for positive
displacement pumps and blowers.
Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be
voltage or current. Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
Bus Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port (FC
port). Digital Outputs
The drive features two solid-state outputs that can supply
a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
Preset Reference
A defined preset reference from -100% to +100% of the
reference range. Selection of eight preset references via DSP
the digital terminals. Digital Signal Processor.
Pulse Reference Relay Outputs

A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs The frequency converter features two programmable relay
(terminal 29 or 33). outputs.
RefMAX ETR
Determines the relationship between the reference input Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in the motor temperature.
3-03 Maximum Reference.
GLCP
RefMIN Graphical Local Control Panel (LCP 102)
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting Initialising
reference. The minimum reference value set in If initialising is carried out (14-22 Operation Mode), the
3-02 Minimum Reference. programmable parameters of the frequency converter
return to their default settings.
Miscellaneous:
Analog Inputs Intermittent Duty Cycle
The analog inputs are used for controlling various An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
functions of the frequency converter. cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
There are two types of analog inputs: period. The operation can be either periodic duty or none-
Current input, 0–20 mA, and 4-20 mA periodic duty.
Voltage input, 0-10 V DC.
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0–20 mA, 4–20
mA, or a digital signal.

1 1 LCP Smart Logic Control (SLC)

The Local Control Panel (LCP) makes up a complete The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed
interface for control and programming of the frequency when the associated user-defined events are evaluated as
converter. The control panel is detachable and can be true by the SLC.
installed up to 3 metres from the frequency converter, for
example, in a front panel with the installation kit option. Thermistor
The Local Control Panel is available in two versions: A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
- Numerical LCP 101 (NLCP) temperature is monitored (frequency converter or motor).
- Graphical LCP 102 (GLCP)

Trip
A state entered in fault situations, for example, the
frequency converter is subject to an over-temperature or
lsb when the frequency converter is protecting the motor
Least significant bit. process or mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause
of the fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled
MCM by activating reset or, in some cases, by being
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for programmed to reset automatically. Do not use trip for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM ≡ 0.5067 mm2. personal safety.
msb Trip Locked

Most significant bit. A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
NLCP intervention, for example, the frequency converter is
Numerical Local Control Panel LCP 101 subject to a short circuit on the output. A locked trip can
only be cancelled by cutting off mains, removing the cause
of the fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter.
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
after the data value is changed. Enter [OK] to activate
to reset automatically. Do not use trip lock for personal
changes to off-line parameters.
safety.
PID Controller
VT Characteristics
The PID controller maintains the desired speed, pressure,
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
temperature by adjusting the output frequency to match
the varying load.
VVCplus
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
RCD
Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the dynamics
Residual Current Device.
and the stability, both when the speed reference is
changed and in relation to the load torque.
Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 set-ups. Change between the
60° AVM
4 parameter set-ups and edit one set-up, while another
Switching pattern called 60° Asynchronous Vector
set-up is active.
Modulation (14-00 Switching Pattern).
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous
Vector Modulation (14-00 Switching Pattern).
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost
constant.

1.1.5 Power Factor 1 1

The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
3 × U × I 1 × COS ϕ
Power factor =
3 × U × I RMS
The power factor for 3-phase control:
I 1 × cos ϕ1 I1
= = since cos ϕ1 = 1
I RMS I RMS
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency

converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
same kW performance.
I RMS = I 12 + I 52 + I 72 +. . + I n2
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different

harmonic currents are low.
The built-in DC coils produce a high power factor, which
reduces the imposed load on the mains supply.

Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
2 Introduction
2 2 DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V DC
have been installed. Check that all voltage inputs
2.1 Safety have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has passed before commencing repair work.
2.1.1 Safety Note
Installation at High Altitudes
WARNING WARNING
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous For installation in altitudes above 3 km (350-500 V), or 2
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of the km (525-690 V), contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
motor, frequency converter, or fieldbus could damage the
equipment or cause serious personal injury or death. The Warning against unintended start
instructions in this manual, as well as national and local
1. The motor can be brought to a stop with digital
rules and safety regulations, must be complied with.
commands, bus commands, references, or a local
stop, while the frequency converter is connected
Safety Regulations to mains. If personal safety considerations make it
1. The frequency converter must be disconnected necessary to ensure that no unintended start
from mains for repairs. Check that the mains occurs, these stop functions are not sufficient.
supply has been disconnected and that the 2. While parameters are being changed, the motor
necessary time has passed before removing could start. [Stop/Reset] must always be
motor and mains plugs. activated; after which data can be modified.
2. [Stop/Reset] does not disconnect the equipment 3. A stopped motor may start if faults occur in the
from mains and is not intended as a safety electronics of the frequency converter, or if a
switch. temporary overload or a fault in the supply mains
3. Correct protective earthing of the equipment or the motor connection ceases.
must be established, the operator must be Refer to VLT® AQUA Drive Operating Instructions for further
protected against supply voltage, and the motor safety guidelines.
must be protected against overload in
accordance with applicable national and local WARNING
regulations.
DISCHARGE TIME!
4. The earth leakage currents are higher than 3.5 Frequency converters contain DC-link capacitors that can
mA. remain charged even when the frequency converter is not
5. Protection against motor overload comes from powered. To avoid electrical hazards, disconnect AC mains,
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is any permanent magnet type motors, and any remote DC-
desired, set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data link power supplies, including battery backups, UPS and
value [4] ETR trip (default value) or data value [3] DC-link connections to other frequency converters. Wait for
ETR warning the capacitors to fully discharge before performing any
service or repair work. The amount of wait time is listed in
NOTE the Discharge Time table. Failure to wait the specified time
The function is initialised at 1.16 x rated motor current and after power has been removed before doing service or
rated motor frequency. For the North American market: repair could result in death or serious injury.
The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload
protection in accordance with NEC. Rating [kW] 380–480 V 525–690 V
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and
110–315 20 minutes
mains supply while the frequency converter is
45–400 20 minutes
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
315-1000 40 minutes
has been disconnected and that the necessary
450–1200 30 minutes
time has passed before removing motor and
mains plugs. Table 2.1 DC Capacitor Discharge Times
7. The frequency converter has more voltage inputs
than L1, L2, and L3, when load sharing (linking of

2.1.2 Disposal Instruction EMC is short for electromagnetic compatibility. The

presence of electromagnetic compatibility means that the
mutual interference between different components/
Do not dispose of equipment containing
electrical components together with
appliances does not affect the way the appliances work. 2 2
The EMC directive came into effect January 1, 1996.
domestic waste.
Danfoss CE-labels in accordance with the directive and
Collect it separately in accordance with
issues a declaration of conformity upon request. To carry
local and currently valid legislation.
out EMC-correct installation, see the instructions in this
Design Guide. Additionally, find specifications of which
Table 2.2 Disposal Instruction standards the Danfoss products comply with. The filters
presented in the specifications are part of the product
range. Furthermore, Danfoss offers other types of
2.2 Software Version
assistance to ensure optimum EMC result.
2.2.1 Software Version and Approvals
2.3.2 What Is Covered
VLT AQUA Drive
The EU "Guidelines on the Application of Council Directive
2004/108/EC" outline three typical situations of using a
frequency converter. See the following list for EMC
coverage and CE labelling.
1. The frequency converter is sold directly to the

This manual can be used with all VLT AQUA Drive frequency
end consumer, for example, to a DIY market. The
converters with software version 1.95.
end consumer is a layman who installs the
The software version number can be found in parameter 15–43.
frequency converter for use with a household
Table 2.3 Software Version appliance. For such applications, the frequency
converter must be CE labelled in accordance with
the EMC directive.
2.3 CE Labelling
2. The frequency converter is sold for installation in
2.3.1 CE Conformity and Labelling a plant designed by professionals of the trade.
The frequency converter and the finished plant
What is CE Conformity and Labelling? do not have to be CE labelled under the EMC
The purpose of CE labelling is to avoid technical trade directive. However, the unit must comply with
obstacles within EFTA and the EU. The EU has introduced the basic EMC requirements of the directive.
the CE label as a simple way of showing whether a Compliance is ensured by using components,
product complies with the relevant EU directives. The CE appliances, and systems that are CE labelled
label says nothing about the specifications or quality of under the EMC directive.
the product. There are three EU directives that regulate 3. The frequency converter is sold as part of a
frequency converters: complete system (an air-conditioning system, for
The machinery directive (2006/42/EC) example). The complete system must be CE
Frequency converters with integrated safety function are labelled in accordance with the EMC directive.
now falling under the Machinery Directive. Danfoss CE- The manufacturer can ensure CE labelling under
labels in accordance with the directive and issues a the EMC directive either by using CE labelled
declaration of conformity upon request. Frequency components or by testing the EMC of the system.
converters without safety function do not fall under the If the manufacturer chooses to use only CE
machinery directive. However, if a frequency converter is labelled components, there is no need to test the
supplied for use in a machine, we provide information on entire system.
safety aspects relating to the frequency converter.
The low-voltage directive (2006/95/EC) 2.3.3 Danfoss Frequency Converter and CE
Frequency converters must be CE labelled in accordance Labelling
with the low-voltage directive of January 1, 1997. The
directive applies to all electrical equipment and appliances
CE labelling is a positive feature when used for its original
used in the 50–1000 V AC and the 75–1500 V DC voltage
purpose, which is to facilitate trade within the EU and
ranges. Danfoss CE-labels in accordance with the directive
EFTA.
and issues a declaration of conformity upon request.
The EMC directive (2004/108/EC)

CE labelling can cover many different specifications so Degree of protection as per IEC 60529
check the CE label to ensure that it covers the relevant The safe stop function can only be installed and operated
applications. in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 or
2 2 higher (or equivalent environment) to avoid cross faults
Danfoss CE labels the frequency converters in accordance and short circuits between terminals, connectors, tracks,
with the low-voltage directive, meaning that if the and safety-related circuitry caused by foreign objects.
frequency converter is installed correctly, Danfoss
guarantees compliance with the low-voltage directive. Liquids can be carried through the air and condense in the
Danfoss issues a declaration of conformity that confirms frequency converter and can cause corrosion of
our CE labelling in accordance with the low-voltage components and metal parts. Steam, oil, and salt water can
directive. cause corrosion of components and metal parts. In such
environments, use equipment with enclosure rating IP54/
If following the instructions for EMC-correct installation IP55. As an extra protection, coated printed circuit boards
and filtering, the CE label also applies. can be ordered as an option.
5.10 EMC-correct Installation offers detailed instructions for Airborne Particles such as dust can cause mechanical,
EMC-correct installation. Furthermore, Danfoss specifies electrical, or thermal failure in the frequency converter. A
which our products comply with. typical indicator of excessive levels of airborne particles is
dust particles around the frequency converter fan. In dusty
environments, use equipment with enclosure rating IP54/
2.3.4 Compliance with EMC Directive
IP55 or a cabinet for IP00/IP20/NEMA 1 equipment.
2004/108/EC
The primary users of the frequency converter are trade In environments with high temperatures and humidity,
professionals, who use it as a complex component forming corrosive gases such as sulphur, nitrogen, and chlorine
part of a larger appliance, system, or installation. The compounds cause chemical processes on the frequency
responsibility for the final EMC properties of the appliance, converter components.
system, or installation rests with the installer. As an aid to
the installer, Danfoss has prepared EMC installation Such chemical reactions damage the electronic
guidelines for the Power Drive system. If the EMC-correct components quickly. In such environments, mount the
instructions for installation are followed, the standards and equipment in a cabinet with fresh air ventilation, keeping
test levels stated for power drive systems are complied aggressive gases away from the frequency converter.
with. See 2.10 Immunity Requirements. An extra protection in such areas is a coating of the
printed circuit boards, which can be ordered as an option.
2.4 Air Humidity

NOTE
The frequency converter has been designed to meet the Mounting frequency converters in aggressive environments
IEC/EN 60068-2-3 standard, EN 50178 pkt. 9.4.2.2 at 50 °C. increases the risk of stoppages and considerably reduces
the life of the converter.
2.5 Aggressive Environments Before installing the frequency converter, check the
A frequency converter contains many mechanical and ambient air for liquids, particles, and gases by observing
electronic components. All are to some extent vulnerable existing installations in this environment. Typical indicators
to environmental effects. of harmful airborne liquids are water or oil on metal parts,
or corrosion of metal parts.
CAUTION Excessive dust particle levels are often found on instal-

The frequency converter must not be installed in lation cabinets and existing electrical installations. One
environments with airborne liquids, particles, or gases indicator of aggressive airborne gases is blackening of
capable of affecting and damaging the electronic copper rails and cable ends on existing installations.
components. Failure to take the necessary protective
measures increases the risk of stoppages, thus reducing D and E enclosures have a stainless steel back channel
the life of the frequency converter. option to provide more protection in aggressive
environments. Proper ventilation is still required for the
internal components of the frequency converter. Contact
Danfoss for more information.

130BA781.10
120
A
2.6 Vibration and Shock SYSTEM CURVE
2 2
100
The frequency converter has been tested according to the 80

procedure based on the following standards: FAN CURVE
PRESSURE %
B
60
The frequency converter complies with requirements that 40

exist for units mounted on the walls and floors of C
production premises, as well as in panels bolted to walls or 20
floors.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Voume %
• IEC/EN 60068-2-6: Vibration (sinusoidal) - 1970
• IEC/EN 60068-2-64: Vibration, broad-band random

120
2.7 Frequency Converter Benefits 100
2.7.1 Why use a Frequency Converter for INPUT POWER % 80

Controlling Fans and Pumps?
60
A frequency converter takes advantage of the fact that 40

centrifugal fans and pumps follow the laws of propor-
ENERGY
tionality for such fans and pumps. For further information, 20
CONSUMED
see the text and Illustration 2.1.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Voume %
2.7.2 The Clear Advantage - Energy Savings
Illustration 2.2 Energy Savings
The clear advantage of using a frequency converter for

controlling the speed of fans or pumps lies in the
electricity savings. 2.7.3 Example of Energy Savings
When comparing with alternative control systems and
technologies, a frequency converter is the optimum energy As can be seen in Illustration 2.3, the flow is controlled by
control system for controlling fan and pump systems. changing the RPM. Reducing the speed only 20% from the
rated speed reduces the flow by 20%. This reduction
occurs because the flow is directly proportional to the
130BA780.10
120 RPM. The consumption of electricity, however, is 50%

A
100 SYSTEM CURVE lower.
If the system in question must supply a flow that
80 corresponds to 100% only a few days in a year, while the
PRESSURE%
FAN CURVE average is below 80% of the rated flow for the remainder
60 B
of the year, the amount of energy saved is even more than
40 50%.
C
20
Q = Flow P = Power
Q1 = Rated flow P1 = Rated power
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
VOLUME% Q2 = Reduced flow P2 = Reduced power
Illustration 2.1 Fan Curves (A, B and C) for Reduced Fan Volumes H = Pressure n = Speed regulation
H1 = Rated pressure n1 = Rated speed
H2 = Reduced pressure n2 = Reduced speed
More than 50% energy savings can be obtained in typical
applications when a frequency converter is used to reduce Table 2.4 Laws of Proportionality
fan capacity to 60%.

Hs
175HA209.11
(mwg)
175HA208.10
100% 60
2 2 80%
50 B
40
30
A 1650rpm
Flow ~n 20
50%
1350rpm
Pressure ~n2 C
10 1050rpm
25% 750rpm
0 100 200 300 400 (m3 /h)

Power ~n3
12,5%
(kW) Pshaft
n
50% 80% 100% 60
Illustration 2.3 Dependence of Flow, Pressure and Power
50
consumption on RPM
A1
1650rpm
40
Q1 n1 30
Flow : =
Q2 n2
( )
B1 1350rpm
H1 n1 2 20
Pressure : =
H2 n2
( )
P1 n1 3 10 1050rpm
Power :
P2
=
n2
C1
750rpm
0 100 200 300 400 (m3 /h)
2.7.4 Example with Varying Flow Over One Illustration 2.5 Energy Savings in a Pump Application
Year
Illustration 2.4 is calculated based on pump characteristics m3/h Distri- Valve regulation Frequency converter
obtained from a pump datasheet. bution control
The result obtained shows energy savings in excess of 50% % Hours Power Consump- Power Consump-
at the given flow distribution over a year. The pay back tion tion
period depends on the price per kWh and the price of the A1 - B1 kWh A1 - C1 kWh
frequency converter. In this example, it is less than a year 350 5 438 42,5 18.615 42,5 18.615
when compared with valves and constant speed.
300 15 1314 38,5 50.589 29,0 38.106
250 20 1752 35,0 61.320 18,5 32.412
Energy savings 200 20 1752 31,5 55.188 11,5 20.148
Pshaft=Pshaft output
150 20 1752 28,0 49.056 6,5 11.388
100 20 1752 23,0 40.296 3,5 6.132
Σ 100 8760 275.064 26.801
Table 2.5 Energy Savings - Calculation
2.7.5 Better Control
If a frequency converter is used for controlling the flow or

pressure of a system, improved control is obtained.
A frequency converter can vary the speed of the fan or
pump, obtaining variable control of flow and pressure.
Furthermore, a frequency converter can quickly adapt the
Illustration 2.4 Flow Distribution over 1 Year
speed of the fan or pump to new flow or pressure
conditions in the system.
Simple control of process (flow, level, or pressure) utilising
the built-in PID control.

2.7.6 Cos φ Compensation
Generally speaking, the frequency converter has a cos φ of

1 and provides power factor correction for the cos φ of the 2 2
motor, which means that there is no need to make
allowance for the cos φ of the motor when sizing the
power factor correction unit.
2.7.7 Star/delta Starter or Soft-starter not

required
When larger motors are started, it is necessary in many

countries to use equipment that limits the start-up current.
In more traditional systems, a star/delta starter or soft-
starter is widely used. Such motor starters are not required
if a frequency converter is used.
As shown in Illustration 2.6, a frequency converter does not

consume more than rated current.
800
175HA227.10
700
600
4
500
% Full load current
400
300 3
200
2
100
1
0
0 12,5 25 37,5 50Hz
Full load
& speed
Illustration 2.6 Current Consumption with a Frequency Converter
1 VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2 Star/delta starter
3 Soft-starter
4 Start directly on mains
Table 2.6 Legend to Illustration 2.6

2.8 Control Structures

2.8.1 Control Principle
2 2
A frequency converter rectifies AC voltage from mains into DC voltage, after which this DC voltage is converted into AC
power with a variable amplitude and frequency.
The motor is supplied with variable voltage/current and frequency, which enables infinitely variable speed control of three-
phased, standard AC motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors.
130BC514.11
3 Phase 91 (L1) (U) 96
power 92 (L2) (V) 97
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
DC bus 88 (-)
89 (+)
(R+) 82 Brake
resistor
(R-) 81
Illustration 2.7 Example Control Frequency
The control terminals provide for wiring feedback, reference, and other input signals to the frequency converter, output of
frequency converter status and fault conditions, relays to operate auxiliary equipment, and serial communication interface.
24 V common power is also provided. Control terminals are programmable for various functions by selecting parameter
options described in the main or quick menus. Most control wiring is customer supplied unless factory ordered. A 24 V DC
power supply is also provided for use with the frequency converter control inputs and outputs.
Table 2.7 describes the functions of the control terminals. Many of these terminals have multiple functions determined by
parameter settings. Some options provide more terminals. See Illustration 2.9 for terminal locations.
NOTE
The example provided does not show optional equipment.

Terminal No. Function

01, 02, 03 and 04, 05, 06 Two form C output relays. Maximum 240 V AC, 2 A. minimum 24 V DC, 10 mA, or 24 V AC, 100 mA. Can
2 2
be used for indicating status and warnings. Physically located on the power card.
12, 13 24 V DC power supply to digital inputs and external transducers. The maximum output current is 200 mA.
18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33 Digital inputs for controlling the frequency converter. R=2 kΩ. Less than 5 V=logic 0 (open). Greater than
10 V=logic 1 (closed). Terminals 27 and 29 are programmable as digital/pulse outputs.
20 Common for digital inputs.
37 0–24 V DC input for safety stop (some units).
39 Common for analog and digital outputs.
42 Analog and digital outputs for indicating values such as frequency, reference, current, and torque. The
analog signal is 0/4 to 20 mA at a maximum of 500 Ω. The digital signal is 24 V DC at a minimum of 500
Ω.
50 10 V DC, 15 mA maximum analog supply voltage for potentiometer or thermistor.
53, 54 Selectable for 0–10 V DC voltage input, R=10 kΩ, or analog signals 0/4 to 20 mA at a maximum of 200 Ω.
Used for reference or feedback signals. A thermistor can be connected here.
55 Common for terminals 53 and 54.
61 RS-485 common.
68, 69 RS-485 interface and serial communication.
Table 2.7 Terminal Control Functions

130BC548.11
TB5
230 VAC
2 2 50/60Hz
230 VAC
R1 Anti-condensation heater (optional)
TB6 Contactor (optional)

50/60Hz
= = =
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
Load Share 88 (-) Switch Mode
Power Supply Regen +
89 (+)
10Vdc 24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 200mA resistor Regen
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + - (R-) 81
+10Vdc
A53 U-I (S201)
Regen - 83
53 (A IN)
1 2
0 VDC - 10VDC
ON
ON=0-20mA Relay1
0/4-20 mA A54 U-I (S202) 03
OFF=0-10V 240Vac, 2A
1 2
54 (A IN)
ON
0 VDC - 10VDC 02
0/4-20 mA 400Vac, 2A
55 (COM A IN) 01
Relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
S801/Bus Term.
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) OFF-ON
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open 1
Brake Temp
0V 5V 2 (NC)
24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP)
24V
0V
S801
0V RS-485 (P RS-485) 68 RS-485
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
(NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN) - option
Illustration 2.8 D-frame Interconnect Diagram

130BA544.12
2 2
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch Mode
DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 200mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + - (R-) 81
+10Vdc
S201
1 2
53 (A IN)
ON
0-10Vdc
ON=0-20mA relay1
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0-10V
1 2
ON
54 (A IN) 240Vac, 2A
0-10Vdc 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
24V (NPN)
24V
0V
S801
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
* (NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN)
Illustration 2.9 E- and F-frame Interconnect Diagram

2.8.2 Control Structure Open Loop
2 2
P 4-13
130BB153.10
Motor speed
high limit [RPM] 100%
Reference
handling P 4-14
Remote Motor speed P 3-4* Ramp 1
reference high limit [Hz] P 3-5* Ramp 2 0% To motor
Remote control
Auto mode
Linked to hand/auto Reference
Ramp
Hand mode Local
Local P 4-11 100%

reference Motor speed
scaled to low limit [RPM]
RPM or Hz -100%
P 4-10
P 3-13 Motor speed
LCP Hand on, Reference P 4-12 direction
off and auto site Motor speed
on keys low limit [Hz]
Illustration 2.10 Open Loop Structure
In the configuration shown in Illustration 2.10, 1-00 Configu-
130BP046.10
ration Mode is set to [0] Open loop. The resulting reference
from the reference handling system or the local reference Hand Auto
Off Reset
on on
is received and fed through the ramp limitation and speed
limitation before being sent to the motor control.
Illustration 2.11 LCP Control Keys
The maximum frequency allowed limits the output from
the motor control.
Hand Off Reference Site Active Reference

2.8.3 Local (Hand On) and Remote (Auto Auto 3-13 Reference Site
On) Control LCP Keys
Hand Linked to Hand/ Local
The frequency converter can be operated manually via the
Auto
LCP or remotely via analog/digital inputs or serial bus.
Hand ⇒ Off Linked to Hand/ Local
If allowed in 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP, 0-41 [Off] Key on
Auto
LCP, 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP, and 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP,
Auto Linked to Hand/ Remote
it is possible to start and stop the frequency converter by
Auto
LCP using the [HandOn] and [Off] keys. Alarms can be
reset via the [Reset] key. After pressing the [Hand On] key, Auto ⇒ Off Linked to Hand/ Remote
Auto
the frequency converter goes into Hand Mode and follows
(as default) the local reference set by pressing the All keys Local Local
navigation keys [▲] and [▼]. All keys Remote Remote
Table 2.8 Conditions for either Local or Remote Reference

After pressing the [Auto On] key, the frequency converter
goes into auto mode and follows (as default) the remote Table 2.8 shows under which conditions either the local
reference. In this mode, it is possible to control the reference or the remote reference is active. One of them is
frequency converter via the digital inputs and various serial always active, but both cannot be active at the same time.
interfaces (RS-485, USB, or an optional fieldbus). See more
about starting, stopping, changing ramps and parameter
Local reference forces the configuration mode to open
set-ups in parameter group 5–1* Digital Inputs or
loop, independent on the setting of 1-00 Configuration
parameter group 8–5* Serial Communication.
Mode.
Local reference is restored at power-down.

2.8.4 Control Structure Closed Loop
The internal controller allows the frequency converter to become a part of the controlled system. The frequency converter
receives a feedback signal from a sensor in the system. It then compares this feedback to a set-point reference value and 2 2
determines the error, if any, between these two signals. It then adjusts the speed of the motor to correct this error.
For example, consider a pump application in which the speed of a pump is controlled so that the static pressure in a pipe is
constant. The desired static pressure value is supplied to the frequency converter as the set-point reference. A static
pressure sensor measures the actual static pressure in the pipe and supplies this information to the frequency converter as a
feedback signal. If the feedback signal is greater than the set-point reference, the frequency converter slows to reduce the
pressure. In a similar way, if the pipe pressure is lower than the set-point reference, the frequency converter speeds up to
increase the pressure provided by the pump.
130BA359.12
100%
Ref. +
Handling 0%
(Illustra- 
tion) _ To motor
PID Scale to
speed control
Feedback *[-1]
Handling 100%
(Illustra-
tion)
-100%
P 20-81 P 4-10
PID Normal/Inverse Motor speed
Control direction
Illustration 2.12 Block Diagram of Closed Loop Controller
While the default values for the closed loop controller often provides satisfactory performance, the control of the system
can often be optimised by adjusting some of the parameters of the closed loop controller. It is also possible to autotune the
PI constants.

2.8.5 Feedback Handling
2 2
130BA354.12
Setpoint to
0% Reference
Handling
Setpoint 1
P 20-21
Setpoint 2
P 20-22 0%
Multi setpoint min.

Setpoint 3
Multi setpoint max.
P 20-23
0%
Feedback
Feedback conv. Feedback 1 Feedback 1 only
Feedback 1 Source
P 20-01 Feedback 2 only
P 20-00 Feedback 3 only
Sum (1+2+3)
Feedback 2 Source Feedback conv. Feedback 2 0%
Difference (1-2)
P 20-04
P 20-03 Average (1+2+3)
Minimum (1|2|3)
Feedback 3 Source Feedback conv. Feedback 3 Maximum (1|2|3)
P 20-07
P 20-06
Feedback Function
P 20-20
Illustration 2.13 Block Diagram of Feedback Signal Processing
Feedback handling can be configured to work with applications requiring advanced control, such as multiple setpoints and
multiple types of feedback. Three types of control are common.
Single zone, single setpoint

Single Zone Single Setpoint is a basic configuration. Setpoint 1 is added to any other reference (if any, see Reference
Handling) and the feedback signal is selected using 20-20 Feedback Function.
Multi-zone, single setpoint
Multi-Zone Single Setpoint uses two or three feedback sensors but only one setpoint. The feedback can be added,
subtracted (only feedback 1 and 2) or averaged. In addition, the maximum or minimum value can be used. Setpoint 1 is
used exclusively in this configuration.
If [13] Multi-Setpoint Min is selected, the setpoint/feedback pair with the largest difference controls the speed of the
frequency converter. [14] Multi-Setpoint Maximum attempts to keep all zones at or below their respective setpoints, while
[13] Multi-Setpoint Minattempts to keep all zones at or above their respective setpoints.
Example:
A two zone, two setpoint application Zone 1 setpoint is 15 bar and the feedback is 5.5 bar. Zone 2 setpoint is 4.4 bar and
the feedback is 4.6 bar. If [14] Multi-Setpoint Max is selected, Zone 1 setpoint and feedback are sent to the PID controller,
since it has the smaller difference (feedback is higher than setpoint, resulting in a negative difference). If [13] Multi-Setpoint
Min is selected, Zone 2 setpoint and feedback is sent to the PID controller, since it has the larger difference (feedback is
lower than setpoint, resulting in a positive difference).

2.8.6 Feedback Conversion
In some applications it could be useful to convert the

feedback signal. One example is using a pressure signal to 2 2
provide flow feedback. Since the square root of pressure is
proportional to flow, the square root of the pressure signal
yields a value proportional to the flow. For an example,
see Illustration 2.14.
130BA358.11
Ref.
signal
Ref.+ PID
P 20-01
P 20-04
-
Desired P 20-07
flow FB conversion FB P
Flow
Flow
FB P
signal
Illustration 2.14 Feedback Conversion

2.8.7 Reference Handling
2 2 Details for Open Loop and Closed Loop operation.

P 3-14
130BA357.12
Preset relative ref.
Input command:
Preset ref. bit0, bit1, bit2
P 1-00
[0] Configuration mode
[1]
[2]
[3]
Input command:
Open loop
Preset ref.
[4] Freeze ref.

P 3-10
Scale to
[5] RPM,Hz
or %
[6]
[7] P 3-04
Ref. function
max ref.
Y Remote
Relative % ref.
X+X*Y 
X ±200%
 /100
±200% %
min ref.
No function
Analog inputs on
Scale to
±200% Closed
Ref. 1 source
Frequency inputs loop

off ±100% unit
Ext. closed loop outputs
Closed loop
P 3-15
Freeze ref.
Input command: &
DigiPot Ref. Preset increase/
decrease
ref.
Input command:
Speed up/ speed down
No function
Analog inputs
Ref. in %
Ref. 2 source
Frequency inputs 
Ext. closed loop outputs
P 3-16
DigiPot
External P 1-00
reference Configuration mode
in % Increase
No function 0/1 Digipot ref.
DigiPot
Analog inputs Decrease ±200%
Closed loop 0/1
Setpoint
Ref. 3 source
Frequency inputs ±200%

Ext. closed loop outputs From Feedback Handling Clear
P 3-17
DigiPot 0% 0/1
Open loop
Bus
reference
Illustration 2.15 Block Diagram Showing Remote Reference
The Remote Reference is comprised of: selected using digital inputs or the serial communications
bus. The reference can also be supplied externally, most
• Preset references. commonly from an analog input. Select this external
source via one of the three reference source parameters
• External references (analog inputs, pulse
(3-15 Reference 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source and
frequency inputs, digital potentiometer inputs,
3-17 Reference 3 Source). Digipot is a digital potentiometer,
and serial communication bus references).
also commonly called a Speed Up/Speed Down Control or
• The preset relative reference. a Floating Point Control. To set it up, one digital input is
programmed to increase the reference while another
• Feedback controlled setpoint.
digital input is programmed to decrease the reference. A
Up to eight preset references can be programmed in the third digital input can be used to reset the digipot
frequency converter. The active preset reference can be reference. All reference resources and the bus reference

are added to produce the total External Reference. The provide a 4–20 mA signal. The output frequency range of
External Reference, the Preset Reference or the sum of the the frequency converter is 10–50 Hz.
two can be selected to be the active reference. Finally, this
reference can by be scaled using 3-14 Preset Relative 1. Start/Stop via switch connected between 2 2
Reference. terminals 12 (+24 V) and 18.
2. Pressure reference via a potentiometer (0–10 Bar,
The scaled reference is calculated as follows: 0–10 V) connected to terminals 50 (+10 V), 53
Reference = X + X × ( 100
Y
) (input) and 55 (common).
Where X is the external reference, the preset reference, or
3. Pressure feedback via transmitter (0–10 Bar, 4–20
the sum of these and Y is 3-14 Preset Relative Reference in
mA) connected to terminal 54. Switch S202
[%].
behind the Local Control Panel set to ON (current
input).
If Y, 3-14 Preset Relative Reference is set to 0%, the scaling
L1
130BA175.12
does not affect the reference. L2
L3
2.8.8 Example of Closed Loop PID Control N
PE
The following is an example of a Closed Loop Control for a F1
booster pump application:
12
130BA488.10
91 92 93 95
37
VLT Pressure transmitter L1 L2 L3 PE
18
50
53 5 kΩ
55
U V W PE
54
Water
96 97 98 99 Transmitter
Pump
Illustration 2.16 Closed Loop PID Control
In a water distribution system, the pressure must be

M
maintained at a constant value. The desired pressure (set- 3
point) is set between 0 and 10 Bar using a 0–10 V
potentiometer or a parameter. The pressure sensor has a Illustration 2.17
range of 0–10 Bar and uses a two-wire transmitter to

2.8.9 Programming Order
2 2 Function
1) Make sure that the motor runs properly. Do the following:
Par. no. Setting
Set the motor parameters using nameplate data. 1–2* As specified by motor name plate
Run Automatic Motor Adaptation. 1–29 [1] Enable complete AMA and then run the AMA
function.
2) Check that the motor is running in the right direction.
Run Motor Rotation Check. 1–28 If the motor runs in the wrong direction, remove
power temporarily and reverse two of the motor
phases.
3) Make sure that the frequency converter limits are set to safe values
Check that the ramp settings are within capabilities of 3–41 60 s.
the drive and allowed application operating specifi- 3–42 60 s.
cations. Depends on motor/load size!
Also active in Hand mode.
Prohibit the motor from reversing (if necessary) 4–10 [0] Clockwise
Set acceptable limits for the motor speed. 4–12 10 Hz, Motor min speed
4–14 50 Hz, Motor max speed
4–19 50 Hz, Drive max output frequency
Switch from open loop to closed loop. 1–00 [3] Closed Loop
4) Configure the feedback to the PID controller.
Select the appropriate reference/feedback unit. 20–12 [71] Bar
5) Configure the set-point reference for the PID controller.
Set acceptable limits for the set-point reference. 3–02 0 Bar
3–03 10 Bar
Choose current or voltage by switches S201/S202
6) Scale the analog inputs used for set-point reference and feedback.
Scale Analog Input 53 for the pressure range of the 6–10 0V
potentiometer (0–10 Bar, 0–10 V). 6–11 10 V (default)
6–14 0 Bar
6–15 10 Bar
Scale Analog Input 54 for pressure sensor (0–10 Bar, 4– 6–22 4 mA
20 mA) 6–23 20 mA (default)
6–24 0 Bar
6–25 10 Bar
7) Tune the PID controller parameters.
Adjust the closed loop controller, if needed. 20–93 See 2.8.11 Manual PID Adjustment.
20–94
8) Finished!
Save the parameter setting to the LCP for safe keeping 0–50 [1] All to LCP
Table 2.9 Programming Closed Loop PID

2.8.10 Tuning the Closed Loop Controller
Once the closed loop controller has been set up, test the
performance of the controller. In many cases, its 2 2
performance is acceptable using the default values of
20-93 PID Proportional Gain and 20-94 PID Integral Time.
However, in some cases it is helpful to optimise these
parameter values to provide faster system response while
still controlling speed overshoot.
2.8.11 Manual PID Adjustment
1. Start the motor

2. Set 20-93 PID Proportional Gain to 0.3 and
increase it until the feedback signal begins to
oscillate. If necessary, start and stop the
frequency converter or make step changes in the
set-point reference to attempt to cause
oscillation. Next reduce the PID Proportional Gain
until the feedback signal stabilises. Then reduce
the proportional gain by 40–60%.
3. Set 20-94 PID Integral Time to 20 s. and reduce it
until the feedback signal begins to oscillate. If
necessary, start and stop the frequency converter
or make step changes in the set-point reference
to attempt to cause oscillation. Next, increase the
PID Integral Time until the feedback signal
stabilises. Then increase of the Integral Time by
15–50%.
4. Use 20-95 PID Differentiation Time only for fast-
acting systems. The typical value is 25% of
20-94 PID Integral Time. Use the differential
function only when the setting of the propor-
tional gain and the integral time has been fully
optimised. Make sure that oscillations of the
feedback signal are sufficiently dampened by the
low-pass filter for the feedback signal
(6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant,
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant, 5-54 Pulse
Filter Time Constant #29 or 5-59 Pulse Filter Time
Constant #33 as required).

2.9 General Aspects of EMC

2.9.1 General Aspects of EMC Emissions
2 2
Electrical interference is most commonly conducted at frequencies in the range 150 kHz to 30 MHz. Airborne interference
from the frequency converter system in the range 30 MHz to 1 GHz is generated from the inverter, motor cable, and the
motor.
As shown in Illustration 2.18, capacitive currents in the motor cable coupled with a high dU/dt from the motor voltage
generate leakage currents.
The use of a screened motor cable increases the leakage current (see Illustration 2.18) because screened cables have higher
capacitance to earth than unscreened cables. If the leakage current is not filtered, it causes greater interference on the
mains in the radio frequency range below 5 MHz. Since the leakage current (I1) is carried back to the unit through the
screen (I 3), in principle, there is only a small electromagnetic field (I4) from the screened motor cable according to
Illustration 2.18.
The screen reduces the radiated interference but increases the low-frequency interference on the mains. The motor cable
screen must be connected to the frequency converter enclosure as well as the motor enclosure. The best way to connect
them is by using integrated screen clamps to avoid twisted screen ends (pigtails). These increase the screen impedance at
higher frequencies, which reduces the screen effect and increases the leakage current (I4).
If a screened cable is used for fieldbus, relay, control cable, signal interface, and brake, the screen must be mounted on the
enclosure at both ends. In some situations, however, it is necessary to break the screen to avoid current loops.
LINE FREQUENCY MOTOR CABLE SCREENED MOTOR
175ZA062.11
CONVERTER
z L1 CS CS
U
I1
z L2 V
z L3 W
z PE PE I2 CS
PE Earth wire
I3
Screen
CS CS CS
I4 I4
Earth Plane
Illustration 2.18 Leakage Currents
Illustration 2.18 shows an example of a 6-pulse frequency converter, but could be applicable to a 12-pulse as well.
If placing the screen on a mounting plate for the frequency converter, the mounting plate must be made of metal, because
the screen currents must be conveyed back to the unit. Ensure good electrical contact from the mounting plate through the
mounting screws to the frequency converter chassis.
When unscreened cables are used, some emission requirements are not complied with, although the immunity
requirements are observed.
To reduce the interference level from the entire system (unit and installation), make motor and brake cables as short as
possible. Avoid placing cables with a sensitive signal level alongside motor and brake cables. Radio interference higher than
50 MHz (airborne) comes from the control electronics. See 5.10 EMC-correct Installation for more information on EMC.

2.9.2 Emission Requirements
According to the EMC product standard for adjustable speed frequency converters EN/IEC 61800-3:2004, the EMC
requirements depend on the environment in which the frequency converter is installed. Four categories are defined in the 2 2
EMC product standard. The definitions of the four categories together with the requirements for mains supply voltage
conducted emissions are given in Table 2.10.
Conducted emission requirement

Category Definition according to the limits given in EN
55011
C1 Frequency converters installed in the first environment (home and office) with a Class B
supply voltage less than 1,000 V.
C2 Frequency converters installed in the first environment (home and office) with a Class A Group 1
supply voltage less than 1,000 V. These frequency converters are not plug-in and
cannot be moved and are intended to for professional installation and commis-
sioning.
C3 Frequency converters installed in the second environment (industrial) with a supply Class A Group 2
voltage lower than 1,000 V.
C4 Frequency converters installed in the second environment with a supply voltage No limit line
equal to or above 1,000 V or rated current equal to or above 400 A or intended for Make an EMC plan
use in complex systems.
Table 2.10 Emission Requirements
When the generic emission standards are used, the frequency converters are required to comply with Table 2.11
Conducted emission requirement

Environment Generic standard
according to the limits given in EN 55011
First environment EN/IEC 61000-6-3 Emission standard for residential, commercial, Class B
(home and office) and light industrial environments.
Second environment EN/IEC 61000-6-4 Emission standard for industrial environments. Class A Group 1
(industrial environment)
Table 2.11 Limits

2.9.3 EMC Test Results (Emission)
2 2 The test results in Table 2.12 have been obtained using a system with a frequency converter (with options if relevant), a
screened control cable, a control box with potentiometer, as well as a motor and motor screened cable.
Phase Conducted emission

RFI filter type Radiated emission
type Maximum shielded cable length
Housing, trades
Industrial Housing, trades, and
Industrial environment and light
environment light industries
industries
EN 55011 EN 55011 EN 55011 Class EN 55011 Class
Setup: S/T EN 55011 Class B
Class A2 Class A1 B A1
H2 (6-pulse) meter meter meter
110-1000 kW 380-480 V T4 50 No No No No
45-1200 kW 525-690 V T7 150 No No No No
H4 (6-pulse)
110-1000 kW 380-480 V T4 150 150 No Yes No
110-400 kW 525-690 V T7 150 30 No No No
B2 (12-pulse)
250-800 kW 380-480 V T4 150 No No No No
355-1200 kW 525-690 V T7 150 No No No No
B4 (12-pulse)
250-800 kW 380-480 V T4 150 150 No Yes No
355-1200 kW 525-690 V T7 150 25 No No No
Table 2.12 EMC Test Results (Emission)
WARNING rectifier load, maintain harmonic currents at a low level to

avoid overload of the transformer and high temperature in
In a domestic environment, this product has the potential the cables.
to cause radio interference, in which case supplementary
mitigation measures are required. This type of power drive
175HA034.10
system is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio
frequency interference is expected when used on such a
network.
Illustration 2.19 Harmonics
2.9.4 General Aspects of Harmonics
Emission
NOTE
A frequency converter takes up a non-sinusoidal current Some of the harmonic currents could disturb communi-
from mains, which increases the input current IRMS. A non- cation equipment connected to the same transformer or
sinusoidal current is transformed with a Fourier analysis cause resonance with power-factor correction batteries.
and split up into sine-wave currents with different
frequencies, such as harmonic currents In with 50 Hz (or 60
To ensure low harmonic currents, the frequency converter
Hz) as the basic frequency:
is equipped with DC link inductors as standard, to reduce
the input current IRMS by 40%.
I1 I5 I7
[Hz] 50 250 350
The voltage distortion on the mains supply voltage
60 300 420
depends on the size of the harmonic currents multiplied
by the mains impedance for the frequency in question.
Table 2.13 Harmonic Currents
The individual voltage harmonics calculate the total
voltage distortion (THD) using this formula:
The harmonics do not affect the power consumption
directly but increase the heat losses in the installation
2 2 2
(transformer, cables). In plants with a high percentage of THD % = U
5
+ U
7
+ ... + U
N

(UN% of U) Compliance with various system level guidelines:

The harmonic current data in the table are given in
2.9.5 Harmonics Emission Requirements accordance with IEC/EN61000-3-12 regarding the Power
Drive Systems product standard. They can be used as the 2 2
basis for calculation of the influence the harmonic current
Equipment connected to the public supply network
has on the power supply system and for the documen-
Options: Definition:
tation of compliance with relevant regional guidelines: IEEE
1 IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Class A for 3-phase balanced
519 -1992; G5/4.
equipment (for professional equipment only up to 1
kW total power).
2 IEC/EN 61000-3-12 Equipment 16 A-75 A and profes- 2.10 Immunity Requirements
sional equipment as from 1 kW up to 16 A phase
current. The immunity requirements for frequency converters
depend on the environment where they are installed. The
Table 2.14 Harmonics Emission Standards requirements for the industrial environment are higher
than the requirements for the home and office
2.9.6 Harmonics Test Results (Emission) environment. All Danfoss frequency converters comply
with the requirements for the industrial environment as
Power sizes P110 - P450 in T4 also complies with IEC/EN well as the lower requirements for home and office
61000-3-12 even though not required because currents are environment with a large safety margin.
above 75 A.
To document immunity against electrical interference from
Individual Harmonic Current In/I1 (%)
electrical phenomena, the following immunity tests have
been made on a system consisting of a frequency
I5 I7 I11 I13
converter (with options if relevant), a screened control
Actual
40 20 10 8 cable and a control box with potentiometer, motor cable,
(typical)
and motor.
Limit for
40 25 15 10 The tests were performed in accordance with the following
Rsce≥120
basic standards:
Harmonic current distortion factor (%)
THD PWHD
Actual
• EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 61000-4-2): Electrostatic
46 45 discharges (ESD): Simulation of electrostatic
(typical)
discharges from human beings.
Limit for
Rsce≥120
48 46
• EN 61000-4-3 (IEC 61000-4-3): Incoming electro-
magnetic field radiation, amplitude modulated
Table 2.15 Harmonics Test Results (Emission) simulation of the effects of radar and radio
communication equipment as well as mobile
If the short-circuit power of the supply Ssc is greater than communications equipment.
or equal to:
• EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 61000-4-4): Burst transients:
Simulation of interference brought about by
SSC = 3 × RSCE × U mains × I equ = 3 × 120 × 400 × I equ switching a contactor, relay, or similar devices.
at the interface point between the customer supply and
the public system (Rsce).
• EN 61000-4-5 (IEC 61000-4-5): Surge transients:
Simulation of transients brought about for
example, by lightning that strikes near instal-
It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the lations.
equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution
network operator if necessary, that the equipment is
• EN 61000-4-6 (IEC 61000-4-6): RF Common mode:
Simulation of the effect from radio-transmission
connected only to a supply with a short-circuit power Ssc
equipment joined by connection cables.
greater than or equal to specified.
Other power sizes can be connected to the public supply See Table 2.16.
network by consultation with the distribution network
operator.

Voltage range: 380-480 V, 525-600 V, 525-690 V

Basic standard Burst Surge ESD Radiated electromagnetic RF common
2 2
IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC field mode voltage
61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-6
Acceptance criterion B B B A A
Line 2 kV/2Ω DM
4 kV CM — — 10 VRMS
4 kV/12Ω CM
Motor 4 kV CM 4 kV/2Ω 1) — — 10 VRMS
Brake 4 kV CM 4 kV/2Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Load sharing 4 kV CM 4 kV/2Ω 1) — — 10 VRMS
Control wires 2 kV CM 2 kV/2Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Standard bus 2 kV CM 2 kV/2Ω1) — — 10 VRMS
Relay wires 2 kV CM 2 kV/2Ω 1) — — 10 VRMS
Application and Fieldbus 2 kV CM
2 kV/2Ω 1) — — 10 VRMS
options
LCP cable 2 kV CM 2 kV/2Ω 1) — — 10 VRMS
External 24V DC 0.5 kV/2Ω DM
2 V CM — — 10 VRMS
1 kV/12Ω CM
Enclosure 8 kV AD
— — 10V/m —
6 kV CD
Table 2.16 EMC Immunity Form

1) Injection on cable shield
AD: Air Discharge
CD: Contact Discharge
CM: Common mode
DM: Differential mode
electrical supply is of the PELV type and the installation is

made as described in local/national regulations on PELV
2.11 Galvanic Isolation (PELV) supplies.
2.11.1 PELV - Protective Extra Low Voltage
All control terminals and relay terminals 01-03/04-06
comply with PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) (Does not
WARNING apply to grounded Delta leg above 400 V).
Installation at high altitude:
380-500 V, enclosure D, E, and F: At altitudes above 3 km, Galvanic (ensured) isolation is obtained by fulfilling
contact Danfoss regarding PELV. requirements for higher isolation and by providing the
525–690 V: At altitudes above 2 km, contact Danfoss relevant creapage/clearance distances. These requirements
regarding PELV. are described in the EN 61800-5-1 standard.
WARNING The components that make up the electrical isolation also

comply with the requirements for higher isolation and the
Touching the electrical parts could be fatal - even after the
relevant test as described in EN 61800-5-1.
equipment has been disconnected from mains.
The PELV galvanic isolation can be shown in six locations
Before touching any electrical parts, wait at least the
(see Illustration 2.20):
amount of time indicated in Table 2.1.
Shorter time is allowed only if indicated on the nameplate
for the specific unit.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
disconnected, such as load sharing (linkage of DC
intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for
kinetic back-up.
PELV offers protection by way of extra low voltage.

Protection against electric shock is ensured when the

To maintain PELV all connections made to the control Leakage current [mA]
130BB955.10
terminals must be PELV, for example, reinforce/double a
insulate the thermistor.

2 2
1. Power supply (SMPS) including signal isolation of
UDC, indicating the intermediate current voltage.
b
2. Gate drive that runs the IGBTs (trigger Cable length [m]
transformers/opto-couplers). Illustration 2.21 Influence of the Cable Length and Power Size
3. Current transducers. on the Leakage Current. Pa>Pb
4. Optocoupler, brake module.

5. Internal inrush, RFI, and temperature The leakage current also depends on the line distortion.
measurement circuits.
6. Custom relays.
130BB956.10
Leakage current [mA]
130BA056.10
3
THVD=0%
THVD=5%
M
5 4 1 2
6
a b Illustration 2.22 Influence of Line Distortion on Leakage Current

Illustration 2.20 Galvanic Isolation
NOTE
The functional galvanic isolation (a and b on drawing) is When a filter is used, turn off 14-50 RFI Filter when
for the 24 V backup option and for the RS-485 standard charging the filter, to avoid a high leakage current making
bus interface. the RCD switch.
2.12 Earth Leakage Current

If the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA, EN/IEC61800-5-1
Follow national and local codes regarding protective (Power Drive System Product Standard) requires special
earthing of equipment with a leakage current >3.5 mA. care. Earth grounding must be reinforced in one of the
Frequency converter technology implies high frequency following ways:
switching at high power, generating a leakage current in
the earth connection. A fault current in the frequency • Earth ground wire (terminal 95) of at least 10
converter at the output power terminals could contain a mm2
DC component which can charge the filter capacitors and
cause a transient earth current.
• Two separate earth ground wires both complying
with the dimensioning rules
The earth leakage current is made up of several contri-
butions and depends on various system configurations See EN/IEC61800-5-1 and EN50178 for further information.
including RFI filtering, screened motor cables, and
frequency converter power. Using RCDs
Where residual current devices (RCDs), also known as earth
leakage circuit breakers (ELCBs), are used, comply with the
following:
Use RCDs of type B only, capable of detecting AC
and DC currents
Use RCDs with an inrush delay to prevent faults
due to transient earth currents
Dimension RCDs according to the system configu-
ration and environmental considerations

RCD with low fcut-off
130BA167.10
130BB958.10
Load
Lleakage[mA]
RCD with high fcut-off
2 2
Speed
50 Hz 150 Hz fsw f [Hz]
Mains 3rd harmonics Cable
fs
Illustration 2.23 Main Contributions to Leakage Current ta tc tb to ta tc tb to ta
Time
Leakage current [mA]
130BB957.10
Illustration 2.25 Typical Braking Cycle

100 Hz
2 kHz
100 kHz Danfoss offers brake resistors with duty cycles of 10% and
40% suitable for use with the VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202. If a
10% duty cycle resistor is applied, it can absorb braking
power up to 10% of the cycle time with the remaining
90% being used to dissipate heat from the resistor.
For resistor selection information, refer to the Brake Resistor

Illustration 2.24 The Influence of the Cut-off Frequency of the
Design Guide.
RCD on what is responded to/measured
NOTE
See also RCD Application Note. If a short circuit in the brake transistor occurs, power
dissipation in the brake resistor is only prevented by using
a mains switch or contactor to disconnect the mains for
2.13 Control with Brake Function the frequency converter. (The frequency converter can
control the contactor).
2.13.1 Selection of Brake Resistor
2.13.2 Control with Brake Function
In certain applications, for instance centrifuges, it is
desirable to bring the motor to a stop more rapidly than
The brake is protected against short-circuiting of the brake
can be achieved through controlling via ramp down or by
resistor, and the brake transistor is monitored to ensure
free-wheeling. In such applications, dynamic braking with a
that short-circuiting of the transistor is detected. A relay/
braking resistor can be utilised. Using a braking resistor
digital output can be used for protecting the brake resistor
ensures that the energy is absorbed in the resistor and not
against overloading with a fault in the frequency converter.
in the frequency converter.
In addition, the brake makes it possible to read out the
momentary power and the mean power for the latest 120
If the amount of kinetic energy transferred to the resistor
s. The brake can also monitor the power energizing and
in each braking period is not known, the average power
make sure that it does not exceed a limit selected in
can be calculated based on the cycle time and braking
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW). In 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring,
time also called intermittent duty cycle. The resistor
select the function to carry out when the power
intermittent duty cycle is an indication of the duty cycle at
transmitted to the brake resistor exceeds the limit set in
which the resistor is active. Illustration 2.25 shows a typical
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW).
braking cycle.
The intermittent duty cycle for the resistor is calculated as CAUTION

follows: Monitoring the brake power is not a safety function; a
thermal switch is required for that purpose. The brake
Duty Cycle = tb/T resistor circuit is not earth leakage protected.
T = cycle time in seconds Over voltage control (OVC) (exclusive brake resistor) can be
tb is the braking time in seconds (as part of the total cycle selected as an alternative brake function in 2-17 Over-
time) voltage Control. This function is active for all units and

ensures that if the DC link voltage increases, a trip can be See 2-10 Brake Function and 2-17 Over-voltage Control to
avoided by increasing the output frequency to limit the select the method used for controlling the intermediate
voltage from the DC link. It is a useful function. circuit voltage level.
2 2
NOTE High temperature
OVC cannot be activated when running a PM motor (when High ambient temperature can cause the frequency
1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM). converter to overheat.
Mains drop-out
During a mains drop-out, the frequency converter keeps
2.14 Mechanical Brake Control
running until the intermediate circuit voltage drops below
2.14.1 Brake Resistor Cabling the minimum stop level, which is typically 15% below the
lowest rated supply voltage.
EMC (twisted cables/shielding) The mains voltage before the drop-out and the motor load
To reduce the electrical noise from the wires between the determines how long it takes for the inverter to coast.
brake resistor and the frequency converter, the wires must
be twisted. Static overload in VVCplus mode
When the frequency converter is overloaded (the torque
For enhanced EMC performance, a metal screen can be limit in 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode/4-17 Torque Limit
used. Generator Mode is reached), the controls reduces the
output frequency to reduce the load.
If the overload is excessive, a current could occur that
2.15 Extreme Running Conditions makes the frequency converter cut out after approx. 5–10
Short circuit (motor phase – phase) s.
The frequency converter is protected against short circuits Operation within the torque limit is limited in time (0–60 s)
by current measurement in each of the three motor phases in 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit.
or in the DC link. A short circuit between two output
phases causes an overcurrent in the inverter. The inverter
2.15.1 Motor Thermal Protection
is turned off individually when the short circuit current
exceeds the permitted value (Alarm 16 Trip Lock.
Danfoss uses motor thermal protection to keep the motor
To protect the drive against a short circuit at the load
from being overheated. It is an electronic feature that
sharing and brake outputs, see the design guidelines.
simulates a bimetal relay based on internal measurements.
Switching on the output The characteristic is shown in Illustration 2.26
Switching on the output between the motor and the
frequency converter is fully permitted and cannot damage
175ZA052.12
t [s]
the frequency converter, but it can cause fault messages to
appear. 2000
Motor-generated overvoltage 1000
600
The voltage in the intermediate circuit is increased when 500
the motor acts as a generator. 400
300
Overvoltage occurs in the following cases: 200
1. The load drives the motor, generating energy. fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)
100
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
2. During deceleration ("ramp-down") if the moment 60
of inertia is high, the friction is low, and the 50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
40
ramp-down time is too short for the energy to be 30
dissipated as a loss in the frequency converter, 20 IM
the motor, and the installation. 10
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN(par. 1-24)
3. In-correct slip compensation setting can cause
Illustration 2.26 Motor Thermal Protection
higher DC link voltage.
The control unit could attempt to correct the ramp if
possible (2-17 Over-voltage Control). In Illustration 2.26, the X-axis is showing the ratio between
The inverter turns off to protect the transistors and the Imotor and Imotor nominal. The Y-axis is showing the time in
intermediate circuit capacitors when a certain voltage level seconds before the ETR cuts off and trips the frequency
is reached. converter. The curves are showing the characteristic

nominal speed at twice the nominal speed and at 0.2x the
130BA151.11
+24V
GND
nominal speed. OFF
B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
2 2 It is clear that at lower speed the ETR cuts off at lower

heat due to less cooling of the motor. In that way, the
motor is protected from being over heated even at low
ON
speed. The ETR feature is calculating the motor PTC / Thermistor
<6.6 k Ω >10.8 k Ω R
temperature based on actual current and speed. The
Illustration 2.28 Digital Input and 24 V Power Supply
calculated temperature is visible as a read out parameter
in 16-18 Motor Thermal in the frequency converter.
Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:

The thermistor cut-out value is > 3kΩ.
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the motor for Parameter set-up:
winding protection. Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 33
Motor protection can be implemented using a range of
techniques: PTC sensor in motor windings; mechanical
+10V
130BA152.10
thermal switch (Klixon type); or Electronic Thermal Relay
39 42 50 53 54 55
(ETR).
175HA183.10
R OFF
(Ω)
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
4000 ON
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.7 kΩ R
3000
Illustration 2.29 Digital Input and 10 V Power Supply
1330
550 Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

250
Parameter set-up:
Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 54
 [°C] Do not select a reference source.
-20°C  nominel -5°C  nominel +5°C
 nominel
+10V
130BA153.11
Illustration 2.27 Trip

39 42 50 53 54 55
OFF
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:

ON
Parameter set-up:
PTC / Thermistor <3.0 k Ω R
Set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip >3.0 k Ω
Set 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 33 Illustration 2.30 Analog Input 10 V Power Supply

Input Supply Voltage V Threshold NOTE

Digital/analog Cut-out Values Cut-out Values The safe stop function of FC 202 can be used for
2 2
Digital 24 < 6.6kΩ - > 10.8kΩ asynchronous and synchronous motors. Two faults can
Digital 10 < 800Ω - > 2.7kΩ occur in the power semiconductor and cause a residual
Analog 10 < 3.0kΩ - > 3.0kΩ rotation when using synchronous motors. The rotation can
be calculated to Angle=360/(Number of Poles). The
application using synchronous motors must consider this
NOTE possibility and ensure that it is not a safety critical issue.
Check that the chosen supply voltage follows the specifi-
This situation is not relevant for asynchronous motors.
cation of the used thermistor element.
Summary
NOTE
With the torque limit feature, the motor is protected from In order to use the safe stop functionality in conformance
being overloaded independent of the speed. With the ETR with the requirements of EN-954-1 Category 3, the instal-
the motor is protected for being over heated and there is lation of safe stop must meet a number of conditions. See
no need for any further motor protection. That means 5.7 Safe Stop Installation for further information.
when the motor is heated up the ETR timer controls for
how long time the motor can be running at the high NOTE
temperature before it is stopped in order to prevent over The frequency converter does not provide a safety-related
heating. If the motor is overloaded without reaching the protection against unintended or malicious voltage supply
temperature where the ETR shuts off the motor, the torque to terminal 37 and subsequent reset. Provide this
limit is protecting the motor and application for being protection via the interrupt device, at the application level,
overloaded. or organisational level.
For more information, see 5.7 Safe Stop Installation.
ETR is activated in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection and is
controlled in 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode. The time
before the torque limit warning trips the frequency
converter is set in 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit.
2.15.2 Safe Stop Operation (optional)
The FC 202 can perform the safety function “Uncontrolled

Stopping by removal of power” (as defined by draft IEC
61800-5-2) or Stop Category 0 (as defined in EN 60204-1).
It is designed and approved suitable for the requirements
of Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1. This functionality is called
safe stop.
Before integration and use of FC 202 safe stop in an instal-
lation, a thorough risk analysis on the installation must be
carried out in order to determine whether the FC 202 safe
stop functionality and safety category are appropriate and
sufficient.
The safe stop function is activated by removing the
voltage at Terminal 37 of the safe inverter. By connecting
the safe inverter to external safety devices providing a safe
relay, an installation for a safe stop category 1 can be
obtained. The safe stop function of FC 202 can be used for
asynchronous and synchronous motors.
WARNING
Safe Stop activation (that is, removal of 24 V DC voltage
supply to terminal 37) does not provide electrical safety.

Selection VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
3 Selection
3.1 General Specifications

3 3
3.1.1 Mains Supply 3x380-480 V AC
N110 N132 N160 N200 N250 N315 P355 P400

Normal Overload =110% current NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
for 60 seconds
Typical Shaft output at 400 V
110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400
[kW]
Typical Shaft output at 460 V [hp] 150 200 250 300 350 450 500 550
Enclosure IP00 E2 E2
Enclosure IP20 D3h D3h D3h D4h D4h D4h
Enclosure IP21/NEMA 1 D1h D1h D1h D2h D2h D2h E1 E1
Enclosure IP54/NEMA 12 D1h D1h D1h D2h D2h D2h E1 E1
Output current
Continuous (at 3x380-440 V) [A] 212 260 315 395 480 588 658 745
Intermittent (at 3x380-440 V) [A] 233 286 347 435 528 647 724 820
Continuous (at 3x441-480 V) [A] 190 240 302 361 443 535 590 678
Intermittent (at 3x441-480 V) [A] 209 264 332 397 487 588 649 746
Continuous kVA (at 400 V AC)
147 180 218 274 333 407 456 516
[kVA]
151 191 241 288 353 426 470 540
[kVA]
Max. Input current
Continuous (3x380-440 V) [A] 204 251 304 381 463 567 647 733
Continuous (3x441-480 V) [A] 183 231 291 348 427 516 580 667
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 315 350 400 550 630 800 900 900
Max. cable size
Motor (mm2/AWG2) 5))
Mains (mm2/AWG2) 5)) 4 x 240
2 x 95 2 x 185 4 x 500 mcm
Loadsharing (mm2/AWG2) 5))
2 x 3/0 2 x 350 mcm
Brake (mm2/AWG2) 5)) 2 x 185
2 x 350 mcm
Estimated power loss at 400 V AC
3)
2555 2949 3764 4109 5129 6663 7532 8677
at rated max load [W]
3)
2557 2719 3612 3561 4558 5703 6724 7819
Weight, enclosure IP00/IP20 kg 234
236 [519]
(lbs.) [515]
62 [135] 125 [275]
Weight, enclosure IP21 kg (lbs.) 270
272 [598]
Weight, enclosure IP54 kg (lbs.) [594]
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output frequency [Hz] 0–590
Heatsink overtemp. trip [°C] 110
Power card ambient trip [°C] 75 85
Table 3.1 Mains Supply 3x380-480 V AC

P450 P500 P560 P630 P710 P800 P1M0

Normal Overload =110% current NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
for 60 seconds
Typical Shaft output at 400 V [kW] 450 500 560 630 710 800 1000
Typical Shaft output at 460 V [hp] 600 700 750 900 1000 1200 1350
3 3
Enclosure IP00 E2
Enclosure IP21/NEMA 1 E1 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4
Enclosure IP54/NEMA 12 E1 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4
Output current
Continuous (at 3x380-440 V) [A] 800 880 990 1120 1260 1460 1720
Intermittent (at 3x380-440 V) [A] 880 968 1089 1232 1386 1606 1892
Continuous (at 3x441-480 V) [A] 730 780 890 1050 1160 1380 1530
Intermittent (at 3x441-480 V) [A] 803 858 979 1155 1276 1518 1683
554 610 686 776 873 1012 1192
[kVA]
582 621 709 837 924 1100 1219
[kVA]
Max. Input current
Continuous (3 x 380-440 V) [A] 787 857 964 1090 1227 1422 1675
Continuous (3 x 441-480 V) [A] 718 759 867 1022 1129 1344 1490
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 900 1600 2000 2500
Max. cable size
Motor (mm2/AWG2)) 8 x 150 12 x 150
8 x 300 mcm 12 x 300 mcm
Mains (mm2/AWG2)) 4 x 240 8 x 240
4 x 500 mcm 8 x 500 mcm
Loadsharing (mm2/AWG2)) 4 x 120
4 x 350 mcm
Brake (mm2/AWG2)) 2 x 185 4 x 185 6 x 185
2 x 350 mcm 4 x 350 mcm 6 x 350 mcm
3)
9473 10162 11822 12512 14674 17293 19278
3)
8527 8876 10424 11595 13213 16229 16624
Weight, enclosure IP00/IP20 kg - - - -
277 [609] - -
[bs.]
Weight, enclosure IP21 kg [lbs.] 313 [689] 1017/1318 [2237/2900] 1260/1561
[2772/3434]
Weight, enclosure IP54 kg [lbs.] 313 [689] 1017/1318 [2237/2900] 1260/1561
[2772/3434]
Efficiency4) 0.98
Heatsink overtemp. trip [°C] 110 95
Power card ambient trip 85

1) For type of fuse, consult the Operating Instructions.
2) American Wire Gauge.
3) The typical power loss is at normal conditions and expected to be within ±15% (tolerance relates to variety in voltage and cable conditions.)
These values are based on a typical motor efficiency (eff2/eff3 border line). Lower efficiency motors add to the power loss in the frequency
converter and the opposite is also true. If the switching frequency is raised from nominal, the power losses rise significantly. LCP and typical
control card power consumptions are included. Further options and customer load can add up to 30 W to the losses (though typically only 4 W
extra for a fully loaded control card or options for slot A or slot B, each).
4) Measured using 5 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
5) Wiring terminals on N132, N160, and N315 frequency converters cannot receive cables one size larger.

3.1.2 Mains Supply 3x525-690 V AC
N75K N90K N110 N132 N160 N200

Normal Overload =110% NO NO NO NO NO NO
current for 60 seconds
3 3 Typical Shaft output at 550 V

[kW]
55 75 90 110 132 160
Typical Shaft output at 575 V

75 100 125 150 200 250
[hp]
Typical Shaft ouptut at 690 V
75 90 110 132 160 200
[kW]
Output current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 90 113 137 162 201 253
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at
99 124 151 178 221 278
550 V)[A]
Continuous (at 575/690 V) [A] 86 108 131 155 192 242
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at
95 119 144 171 211 266
575/690 V) [kVA]
Continuous kVA (at 550 V)
86 108 131 154 191 241
[kVA]
86 108 130 154 191 241
[kVA]
103 129 157 185 229 289
[kVA]
Max. Input current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 89 110 130 158 198 245
Continuous (at 575 V) [A] 85 106 124 151 189 234
Continuous (at 690 V) [A] 87 109 128 155 197 240
Max. cable size: mains, motor, 2x95 (2x3/0)
brake, and load share
(mm2/AWG2))
Max. external mains fuses [A] 160 315 315 315 350 350
Estimated power loss at 575 V
3)
1,161 1,426 1,739 2,099 2,646 3,071
[W]
Estimated power loss at 690 V
1,203 1,476 1,796 2,165 2,738 3,172
[W]3)
Weight, enclosures IP20, IP21, 62 (135)
IP54 kg (lbs.)
Efficiency 4) 0.98
Heatsink overtemp. trip [°C] 110
Power card ambient trip [°C] 75

N250 N315 N400 P450 P500 P560

Normal Load NO NO NO NO NO NO
Typical Shaft output at 550 V [kW] 200 250 315 355 400 450
Typical Shaft output at 575 V [hp] 300 350 400 450 500 600
Typical Shaft output at 690 V [kW] 250 315 400 450 500 560
Enclosure IP00
Enclosure IP20 D4h D4h D4h
E2 E2 E2
3 3
Enclosure IP21 D2h D2h D2h E1 E1 E1
Enclosure IP54 D2h D2h D2h E1 E1 E1
Output current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 303 360 418 470 523 596
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 550 V)[A] 333 396 460 517 575 656
Continuous (at 575/690 V) [A] 290 344 400 450 500 570
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 575/690 V) 319 378 440 495 550 627
[kVA]
Continuous kVA (at 550 V) [kVA] 289 343 398 448 498 568
Max. Input current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 299 355 408 453 504 574
Continuous (at 575 V) [A] 286 339 390 434 482 549
Continuous (at 690 V) [A] 296 352 400 434 482 549
Max. cable size: mains, motor, brake, and
2x185 (2x350 mcm)
load share (mm2 / AWG2))
Max. external mains fuses [A] 400 500 550 700 700 900
Estimated power loss at 575 V [W] 3) 3,719 4,460 5,023 5,323 6,010 7,395
Estimated power loss at 690 V [W] 3) 3,848 4,610 5,150 5,529 6,239 7,653
Weight, enclosure IP20, IP21, IP54 kg (lbs.) 125 (275)
Efficiency 4) 0.98
Output frequency [Hz] 0–590 0–525
Heatsink overtemp. trip [°C] 110 95

P630 P710 P800 P900 P1M0 P1M2 P1M4

Normal Load
Typical Shaft output at 575 V [hp] 650 750 950 1050 1150 1350 1550
3 3 Enclosure IP00
Enclosure IP21
E2
E1 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4 F2/F4
Enclosure IP54 E1 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4 F2/F4
Output current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 630 763 889 988 1108 1317 1479
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 550 V) 693 839 978 1087 1219 1449 1627
[A]
Continuous (at 575/690 V) [A] 630 730 850 945 1060 1260 1415
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 575/690 693 803 935 1040 1166 1386 1557
V) [kVA]
Continuous kVA (at 550 V) [kVA] 600 727 847 941 1056 1255 1409
Max. Input current
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 607 743 866 962 1079 1282 1440
Continuous (at 575 V) [A] 607 711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
Continuous (at 690 V) [A] 607 711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
Max cable size
Motor (mm2/AWG2) ) 8x150 12x150
4x240 (8x300 mcm) (12x300 mcm)
Mains (mm2/AWG2) ) (4x500 8x240 8x240
mcm) (8x500 mcm) (8x500 mcm)
Loadsharing (mm2/AWG2)) 4x185 6x185
Brake (mm2/AWG2)) 2x185 (4x350 mcm) (6x350 mcm)
(2x350
mcm)
Max. external mains fuses [A] 900 1600 1600 1600 1600 2000 2500
Estimated power loss at 575 V [W] 3) 8209 9500 10872 12316 13731 16190 18536
Estimated power loss at 690 V [W] 3) 8495 9863 11304 12798 14250 16821 19247
Weight, enclosure IP20, IP21, IP54 kg
125 (275)
(lbs.)
Efficiency 4) 0.98
Heatsink overtemp. trip [°C] 110 95 105 95 105 95

1) For type of fuse, consult the Operating Instructions.
2) American Wire Gauge.
3) The typical power loss is at normal conditions and expected to be within ±15% (tolerance relates to variety in voltage and cable conditions.)
extra for a fully loaded control card or options for slot A or slot B, each).
4) Measured using 5 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

Frame size Description Maximum weight [kg] ([lbs.])

D5h D1h ratings+disconnect and/or brake chopper 166 (255)
D6h D1h ratings+contactor and/or circuit breaker 129 (285)
D7h D2h ratings+disconnect and/or brake chopper 200 (440)
D8h D2h ratings+contactor and/or circuit breaker 225 (496)
Table 3.6 D5h–D8h Weights 3 3

3.1.3 12-Pulse Specifications
Mains Supply 380-480 V AC

P315 P355 P400 P450 P500 P560 P630 P710 P800 P1M0
Normal overload 110% for 1 Minute NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Typical Shaft Output [kW] at 400 V 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 1000
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 460 V 450 500 550/600 600 650 750 900 1000 1200 1350
IP 21/ NEMA 1 F8/F9 F10/F11 F12/F13
IP 54 / NEMA 12 F8/F9 F10/F11 F12/F13
Output Current
Continuous (at 380-440 V) 600 658 745 800 880 990 1120 1260 1460 1720
Intermittent (60 second overload at
380-440 V) 660 724 820 880 968 1089 1232 1386 1606 1892
Continuous (at 400 V) 416 456 516 554 610 686 776 873 1,012 1,192
Intermittent (60 second overload at
460-500 V) 457 501 568 610 671 754 854 960 1,113 1,311
Continuous (at 441–500 V) 540 590 678 730 780 890 1,050 1,160 1,380 1,530
Intermittent (60 second overload) (at
441–500 V) 594 649 746 803 858 979 1,155 1,276 1,518 1,683
Continuous (at 460 V) 430 470 540 582 621 709 837 924 1,100 1,219
Continuous (at 500 V) 473 517 594 640 684 780 920 1,017 1,209 1,341
Max Input Current
Continuous (3x380-440v) [A] 590 647 733 787 857 964 1,090 1,227 1,422 1,675
Continuous (3x441-480v) [A] 531 580 667 718 759 867 1,022 1,129 1,344 1,490
Max. external mains fuses1) 700 700 700 700 900 900 900 1,500 1,500 1,500
Max Cable Size:
Motor (mm2 /AWG2)) 12 x 300 MCM (8
8 x 300 MCM (8 x 150)
x 150)
Mains (mm2 /AWG2)) 8 x 500MCM (8 x 250)
Regeneration terminals (mm2/AWG2)) 4 x 250 MCM (4 x 120)
Brake (mm2 /AWG2)) 2 x 350 MCM (2 x 185) 4 x 350 MCM (4 x 185)
Estimated Power loss at 400 V AC at
6705 7532 8677 9473 10162 11822 12512 14674 17293 19278
rated max. load (W) 3)
6705 6724 7819 8527 8876 10424 11595 13213 16229 16624
F9/F11/F13 Max. additional losses for
682 766 882 963 1054 1093 1230 2280 2236 2541
A1, RFI, CB or disconnect & contactor
Weight Enclosure IP21 kg (lb) 263 270 272 313
1004 (2214) 1246 (2748)
Weight enclosure IP 54 kg (lb) (580) (595) (600) (690)
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output Frequency 0-590 Hz
Heatsink overtemp. trip 110 °C 95 °C
Power card ambient trip 85 °C
Table 3.7 Mains Supply 380-480 V AC

Mains Supply 525-690 V AC

P450 P500 P560 P630 P710 P800 P900 P1M0 P1M2 P1M4
Normal overload 110% for 1 Minute NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 525-550 V 355 400 450 500 560 670 750 850 1000 1100
Typical Shaft Output [kW] at 690 450 500 560 630 710 800 900 1000 1200 1400
3 3 Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 575

IP 21/ NEMA 1 at 525 V
450 500
F8/F9
600 650 750 950
F10/F11
1050 1150 1350
F12/F13
1550
IP 21/ NEMA 1 at 575 V F8/F9 F10/F11 F12/F13

IP 21/ NEMA 1 at 690 V F8/F9 F10/F11 F12/F13
Output Current
Continuous (6 x 525-550 V) [A] 470 523 596 630 763 889 988 1108 1317 1479
Intermittent (6 x 550 V) 515 575 656 693 839 978 1087 1219 1449 1627
Continuous (6 x 551-690 V) [A] 450 500 570 630 730 850 945 1060 1260 1415
Intermittent (6 x 551-690 V) [A] 495 550 627 693 803 935 1040 1166 1386 1557
Continuous KVA (550 V) [KVA] 448 498 568 600 727 847 941 1056 1255 1409
Max Input Currnet
Continuous (6 x 550v) [A] 453 504 574 607 743 866 962 1079 1282 1440
Continuous (6 x 575v) [A] 434 482 549 607 711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
Continuous (6 x 690v) [A] 434 482 549 607 711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
Max. external mains fuses1) 630 630 630 630 900 900 900 1600 2000 2500
Max Cable Size:
Motor (mm2 /AWG2)) 8 x 300 MCM (8 x 150) 12 x 300 MCM (12 x 150)
Mains (mm2 /AWG2)) 8 x 500 MCM (8 x 250)
Regeneration terminals (mm2/AWG2)) 4 x 250 MCM (4 x 120)
Brake (mm2 /AWG2)) 4 x 350 MCM (4 x 185)
4974 5623 7018 7793 8933 10310 11692 12909 15358 17602
5128 5794 7221 8017 9212 10659 12080 13305 15865 18173
Weight Enclosure IP21 kg (lb)
440/656 (880/1443) 880/1096 (1936/2471) 1022/1238 (2248/2724)
Weight enclosure IP 54 kg (lb)
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output Frequency 0-525 Hz
Heatsink overtemp trip 110 °C 95 °C 105 °C 95 °C 95 °C 105 °C 95 °C
Power card ambient trip 85 °C
Table 3.8 Mains Supply 525-690 V AC

1) For type of fuse, consult the Operating Instructions
2) American Wire Gauge
3) The typical power loss is at normal conditions and expected to be within +/- 15% (tolerance relates to variety in voltage and cable conditions.)
extra for a fully loaded control card or options for slot A or slot B, each)
4) Measured using 5 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency

Protection and Features
• Electronic thermal motor protection against overload.
• Temperature monitoring of the heatsink ensures that the frequency converter trips when the temperature reaches
95 °C ± 5 °C. An overload temperature cannot be reset until the temperature of the heatsink is below 70 °C ± 5 °C
(Guideline - these temperatures vary for different power sizes and enclosures). VLT® AQUA Drive has an auto
derating function to prevent its heatsink reaching 95 °C. 3 3
• The frequency converter is protected against short-circuits on motor terminals U, V, W.
• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter trips or issues a warning (depending on the load).
• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter trips if the intermediate circuit
voltage is too low or high.
• The frequency converter is protected against earth faults on motor terminals U, V, W.
Mains supply
Supply terminals (6-pulse) L1, L2, L3
Supply terminals (12-pulse) L1-1, L2-1, L3-1, L1-2, L2-2, L3-2
Supply voltage 380-480 V ±10%
Mains voltage low/mains drop-out:
During low mains voltage or a mains drop-out, the frequency converter continues until the intermediate circuit voltage drops
below the minimum stop level, which corresponds typically to 15% below the lowest rated supply voltage. Power-up and full
torque cannot be expected at mains voltage lower than 10% below the lowest rated supply voltage.
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz +4/-6%
The frequency converter power supply is tested in accordance with IEC61000-4-28, 50 Hz +4/-6%.
Max. imbalance temporary between mains phases 3.0% of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor (λ) ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cosφ) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ enclosure type D, E, F maximum 1 time/2 min.
Environment according to EN60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100.000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 480/600 V
maximum.
Motor output (U, V, W)
Output voltage 0–100 % of supply voltage
Output frequency 0-590 Hz
Switching on output Unlimited
Ramp times 1–3600 s
Torque characteristics
Starting torque (Constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 minute*
Starting torque maximum 135% up to 0.5 s*
Overload torque (Constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 minute*
*Percentage relates to nominal torque of VLT AQUA Drive.

Cable lengths and cross sections

Max. motor cable length, screened/armoured 150 m
Max. motor cable length, unscreened/unarmoured 300 m
Max. cross section to motor, mains, load sharing, and brake *
Maximum cross section to control terminals, rigid wire 1.5 mm2/16 AWG (2 x 0.75 mm2)
1 mm2/18AWG
3 3
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible cable
Maximum cross section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core 0.5 mm2/20AWG
Minimum cross section to control terminals 0.25 mm2
* See 3.1 General Specifications for more information!
Control card, RS-485 serial communication
Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally seated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV).
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
Voltage mode Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level 0 to + 10 V (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 10 kΩ
Max. voltage ± 20 V
Current mode Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Max. current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs Max. error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth 200 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
PELV isolation
130BA117.10
+24V
Control Mains
18
High
voltage Motor
37
Functional
isolation
RS485 DC-Bus
Illustration 3.1 PELV Isolation of Analog Inputs
Analog output
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4-20 mA
Max. resistor load to common at analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Max. error: 0.8% of full scale
Resolution on analog output 8 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Digital inputs
Programmable digital inputs 4 (6)
Terminal number 1), 1),
18, 19, 27 29 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0–24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP > 10 V DC 3 3
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN > 19 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN < 14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
Digital output
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 29 1)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0-24 V
Max. output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Max. load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Max. capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Pulse inputs
Programmable pulse inputs 2
Terminal number pulse 29, 33
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 110 kHz (Push-pull driven)
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Min. frequency at terminal 29, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see section on Digital input
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Pulse input accuracy (0.1 - 1 kHz) Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Control card, 24 V DC output

Terminal number 12, 13
Max. load 200 mA
The 24V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
Relay outputs
Programmable relay outputs 2
Relay 01 Terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 V DC, 1 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Relay 02 Terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load)2)3) 400 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A

Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1A
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 240V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240V AC, 0.2A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 50 V DC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
3 3 Min. terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO)
Environment according to EN 60664-1
24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 20 mA
overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 parts 4 and 5
The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 V AC 2A
Control card, 10 V DC output

Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5V
Max. load 25 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control characteristics
Resolution of output frequency at 0-590 Hz ±0.003Hz
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) ≤ 2 ms
Speed control range (open loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open loop) 30–4000 rpm: Maximum error of ±8 rpm
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor
Surroundings
Enclosure type D1h/D2h/E1/E2 IP00/chassis
Enclosure type D3h/D4h IP20/chassis
Enclosure type D1h/D2h, E1, F1-F4, F8-F13 IP21/Type 1, IP54/Type 12
Vibration test enclosure D/E/F 1g
Maximum relative humidity 5% - 95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3), coated class 3C3
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (10 days)
Ambient temperature (at 60 AVM switching mode) Max. 45 °C
Maximum ambient temperature with reduced load 55 °C
Derating for high ambient temperature, see 3.5 Special Conditions
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 0 °C
Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance - 10 °C
Temperature during storage/transport -25 - +65/70 °C
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 1000 m
Maximum altitude above sea level with derating 3000 m
Derating for high altitude, see 3.5 Special Conditions
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3
EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
See 3.5 Special Conditions for more information.
Control card performance
Scan interval 5 ms
Control card, USB serial communication

USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug

CAUTION Efficiency of the motor (ηMOTOR)

The efficiency of a motor connected to the frequency
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device converter depends on magnetizing level. In general, the
USB cable. efficiency is as good as with mains operation. The
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the efficiency of the motor depends on the type of motor.
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is not galvanically isolated from
protection earth. Use only isolated laptop/PC as connection
In the range of 75–100% of the rated torque, the efficiency 3 3
of the motor is practically constant, both when the
to the USB connector on the frequency converter or an
frequency converter controls it and when it runs directly
isolated USB cable/converter.
on mains.
3.2 Efficiency In small motors, the influence from the U/f characteristic
on efficiency is marginal. However, in motors from 11 kW
Efficiency of the frequency converter (ηVLT)
and up, the advantages are significant.
The load on the frequency converter has little effect on its
efficiency. In general, the efficiency is the same at the
In general, the switching frequency does not affect the
rated motor frequency fM,N, even if the motor supplies
efficiency of small motors. Motors from 11 kW and up have
100% of the rated shaft torque or only 75%, in case of part
their efficiency improved (1–2%) because the shape of the
loads.
motor current sine wave is almost perfect at high
switching frequency.
The efficiency of the frequency converter does not change
even if other U/f characteristics are chosen.
Efficiency of the system (ηSYSTEM)
However, the U/f characteristics influence the efficiency of
To calculate the system efficiency, the efficiency of the
the motor.
frequency converter (ηVLT) is multiplied by the efficiency of
the motor (ηMOTOR):
The efficiency declines slightly when the switching
ηSYSTEM=ηVLT x ηMOTOR
frequency is set to a value of above 5 kHz. The efficiency is
slightly reduced when the mains voltage is 480 V, or if the
motor cable is longer than 30 m. 3.3 Acoustic Noise
Frequency converter efficiency calculation The acoustic noise from the frequency converter comes
Calculate the efficiency of the frequency converter at from three sources:
different speeds and loads based on Illustration 3.2. The 1. DC intermediate circuit coils.
factor in this graph must be multiplied with the specific
2. Integral fan.
efficiency factor listed in the specification tables in
3.1.1 Mains Supply 3x380-480 V AC and 3.1.2 Mains Supply 3. RFI filter choke.
3x525-690 V AC. The typical values measured at a distance of 1 m from the
1.01 unit:
130BB252.11
1.0
0.99 Enclosure Full fan speed [dBA]
Relative Efficiency
0.98
N110 71
0.97
N132 71
0.96
0.95
N160 72
0.94 N200 74
0.93 N250 75
0.92 N315 73
0% 50% 100% 150% 200%
E1/E2 * 74
% Speed
100% load 75% load 50% load 25% load
E1/E2 ** 83
F1/F2/F3/F4 80
Illustration 3.2 Typical Efficiency Curves
F8/F9/F10/F11/F12/F13 84.5
* 315 kW, 380–480 VAC. 450 kW and 500 kW, 525–690 V
AC only.
Example: Assume a 160 kW, 380–480 V AC frequency ** Remaining E1+E2 power sizes.
converter at 25% load at 50% speed. Illustration 3.2 shows
0.97 - rated efficiency for a 160 kW frequency converter is Table 3.9 Acoustic Noise Levels
0.98. The actual efficiency is then: 0.97x 0.98=0.95.

Frequency converter P400 - P1M0, T4/380-500 V

Mains
3.4 Peak Voltage on Motor Cable voltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt
length [m] [V] [μsec] [kV] [kV/μsec]
When a transistor in the inverter bridge switches, the
30 500 0.71 1.165 1.389
voltage across the motor increases by a dU/dt ratio
3 3
30 400 0.61 0.942 1.233
depending on:
30 500 1 0.80 0.906 0.904
• the motor cable (type, cross-section, length 30 1 0.82 0.760 0.743
screened or unscreened) 400
• inductance Table 3.11 P400 - P1M0, T4/380-500 V

The natural induction causes an overshoot UPEAK in the 1) With Danfoss dU/dt filter.
motor voltage before it stabilises itself at a level
N110-N160, T7 (525-690 V)
depending on the voltage in the intermediate circuit. The
Mains
rise time and the peak voltage UPEAK affect the service life
Cable voltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt
of the motor. If the peak voltage is too high, especially
motors without phase coil insulation are affected. If the
motor cable is short (a few metres), the rise time and peak 150 690 0.36 2135 2.197
voltage are lower.
Table 3.12 N110-N160, T7 (525-690 V)
If the motor cable is long (100 m), the rise time and peak
voltage increases. N200-N400, T7 (525-690 V)
Mains
In motors without phase insulation paper or other Cable voltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt
insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with length [m] [V] [μsec] [kV] [kV/μsec]
voltage supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a sine- 150 690 0.46 2210 1.744
wave filter on the output of the frequency converter.
Table 3.13 N200-N400, T7 (525-690 V)
To obtain approximate values for cable lengths and Frequency converter P450 - P1M4, T7/525-690 V
voltages not mentioned here, use the following rules of Mains
thumb: Cable voltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt
1. Rise time increases/decreases proportionally with 30 690 0.57 1.611 2.261
cable length. 30 575 0.25 2.510
2. UPEAK = DC link voltage x 1.9 30 690 1) 1.13 1.629 1.150
(DC link voltage = Mains voltage x 1.35).
Table 3.14 P450 - P1M4, T7/525-690 V
/
3. 0.8 × U PEAK
dU dt = 1) With Danfoss dU/dt filter.
Risetime
Data are measured according to IEC 60034-17.

Cable lengths are in metres. 3.5 Special Conditions
Cable Length Specifications: 3.5.1 Purpose of Derating

Frequency converter N110 - N315, T4/380-500 V Consider derating when using the frequency converter at
Mains low air pressure (heights), at low speeds, with long motor
Cable voltage Rise time Vpeak dU/dt cables, cables with a large cross section or at high ambient
length [m] [V] [μsec] [kV] [kV/μsec] temperature. The required action is described in this
30 400 0.26 1.180 2.109 section.
Table 3.10 N110 - N315, T4/380-500 V

3.5.2 Derating for Low Air Pressure
The cooling capability of air is decreased at lower air

pressure.
Below 1000 m altitude no derating is necessary but above

1000 m the ambient temperature (TAMB) or max. output
current (Iout) derate in accordance with

An alternative is to lower the ambient temperature at high continuously at less than half its rated speed, apply more
altitudes and ensure 100% output current at high altitudes. cooling.
As an example of how to read the graph, the situation at 2
km is elaborated. At a temperature of 45 °C (TAMB, MAX - 3.3 Alternately, an oversized motor can be used to reduce the
K), 91% of the rated output current is available. At a load level. However, the size of the motor is limited to one
temperature of 41.7 °C, 100% of the rated output current size larger than that specified by the frequency converter.
is available. 3 3
An alternative is to reduce the load level of the motor by
IOUT(%) choosing a larger motor. However, the design of the
130BB008.10
100
frequency converter puts a limit to the motor size.
95 Variable (Quadratic) torque applications (VT)
90 In VT applications such as centrifugal pumps and fans,

where the torque is proportional to the square of the
speed and the power is proportional to the cube of the
85
speed, there is no need for more cooling or de-rating of
the motor.
80
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Altitude (meters above sea level)* In the graphs shown below, the typical VT curve is below
Illustration 3.3 Derating of Output Current Versus Altitude at the maximum torque with de-rating and maximum torque
TAMB, MAX with forced cooling at all speeds.
120
130BA893.10
(°C)
130BB009.10
100
45 1)
80
60
T%
40
Amb. Temp.
HO
40
35 20
NO
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
30 v%
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Illustration 3.5 Maximum Load for a Standard Motor at 40 °C
Altitude (meters above sea level)*
Illustration 3.4 Derating of Output Current Versus Altitude at
TAMB, MAX
─ ─ ─ ─ Typical torque at VT load
─•─•─•─ Max torque with forced cooling
‒‒‒‒‒ Max torque
3.5.3 Derating for Running at Low Speed
When a motor is connected to a frequency converter, it is
necessary to check that the cooling of the motor is NOTE
adequate. Over-synchronous speed operation results in the available
The level of heating depends on the load on the motor, as motor torque decreasing inversely proportional with the
well as the operating speed and time. increase in speed. Consider this decrease during the design
phase to avoid overloading the motor.
Constant torque applications (CT mode)
In constant torque applications, it is possible for a motor

to draw full current while operating at slow speeds. In
such cases, the cooling fins do not adequately cool the
motor, causing it to overheat. When the motor is operating

3.5.4 Automatic Adaptations to Ensure Performance
The frequency converter constantly checks for critical levels of internal temperature, load current, high voltage on the
intermediate circuit and low motor speeds. As a response to a critical level, the frequency converter can adjust the
switching frequency and/or change the switching pattern in order to ensure the performance of the frequency converter.
The capability to reduce the output current automatically extends the acceptable operating conditions even further.
3 3
3.5.5 Derating for Ambient Temperature
Frame
Normal overload NO, 110% 60 AVM Normal overload NO, 110% SFAVM
model
D-Frame
130BX476.10
110
130BX474.10
110
N110 to N315 100
100
380-500 V 90
90
Iout [%]
Iout [%]
80
80 o
70 40 C
o o
45 C 45 C
70 o
50 C
o 60 o
50 C 55 C
60 o
55 C 50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
50 fsw [kHz]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
fsw [kHz]
E & F-Frame
130BX480.10
130BX478.10
110
110
P355 to P1M0
100
380-500 V 100
90
Iout [%]
90
Iout [%]
80
80
o
70 45 C o
70 40 C
o o
50 C 45 C
o
60 o 50 C
55 C 60 o
55 C
50
50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5
fsw [kHz]
fsw [kHz]
Table 3.16 Derating Tables for Frequency Converters Rated 380–500 V (T5)
Frame
model
D-Frame
130BX482.10
130BX484.10
110 110
N110 to N315
100 100
525-690 V
90
90
Iout [%]
Iout [%]
80
80 o
70 40 C
o o
70 45 C 45oC
o 50 C
50 C 60 o
55 C
60 o
55 C 50
50 0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 fsw [kHz]
fsw [kHz]

Frame
model
D-Frame
130BX486.10
130BX488.10
110 110
N400
100 100
525-690 V
90
3 3
90
Iout [%]
Iout [%]
80
80
o
70 45 C o
o 70 40 C
50 C o
45 C
60 o o
55 C 50 C
60 o
55 C
50
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 50
fsw [kHz] 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
fsw [kHz]
E & F-Frame 110
130BX490.10
130BX492.10
110
P450 to P1M0
100
100
525-690 V
90
Iout [%]
90
80
Iout [%]
80
o
45 C
70
o
50 C 70
40o C
60 o 45o C
55 C
60 50o C
50 55o C
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 50
fsw [kHz] 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
fsw [kHz]
Table 3.17 Derating Tables for Frequency Converters Rated 525–690 V (T7)

3.6 Options and Accessories Galvanic isolation in the MCB 101

If using the internal 24 V power supply (terminal 9) to
Danfoss offers a wide range of options and accessories for switch digital inputs 7, 8 or 9, establish the connection
the frequency converters. between terminal 1 and 5, which is illustrated in
Illustration 3.7.
3.6.1 General Purpose Input Output
3 3 Module MCB 101 Control card (FC 100/200/300)
130BA209.10
MCB 101 is used for extension of the number of digital CPU
and analog inputs and outputs of the frequency converter. 0V 24V
CAN BUS
General Purpose
I/O option MCB 101
Contents: MCB 101 must be fitted into slot B in the

CPU
frequency converter.
0V 24V
• MCB 101 option module DIG & ANALOG
DIG IN
• Extended LCP frame RIN=
5kohm
ANALOG
OUT
IN RIN=
10kohm
• Terminal cover
0/4-20mA
COM DIN
0/24VDC
0/24VDC
GND(1)
GND(2)
DOUT3
DOUT4
AOUT2
FC Series
130BA208.10
MCB 101
DIN7
DIN8
DIN9
AIN3
AIN4
24V
General Purpose I/O B slot
X30/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SW. ver. XX.XX Code No. 130BXXXX
GND(1)
GND(2)
DOUT3
DOUT4
AOUT2
COM
DIN7
DIN8
DIN9
AIN3
AIN4
24V
DIN
>600 ohm
<500 ohm
0-10
X30/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VDC
>600 ohm
PLC
Illustration 3.6 MCB 101 (PNP) 0-10
VDC
0V 24V DC
PLC
(NPN)
24V DC 0V
Illustration 3.7 Principle Diagram

3.6.2 Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4
Parameters for set-up: 5–16, 5–17 and 5–18

Number of Voltage level Voltage levels Tolerance Max. Input impedance
digital inputs
3 0-24V DC PNP type:
Common = 0V
± 28 V continuous
± 37 V in minimum 10
Approx. 5 kΩ
3 3
Logic “0”: Input < 5 V DC sec.
Logic “0”: Input > 10 V DC
NPN type:
Common = 24 V
Logic “0”: Input > 19 V DC
Logic “0”: Input < 14 V DC
Table 3.18 Digital Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4
3.6.3 Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12
Parameters for set-up: 6–3*, 6–4* and 16–76

Number of analog voltage inputs Standardised input signal Tolerance Resolution Max. Input impedance
2 0-10V DC ± 20 V continuously 10 bits Approx. 5 KΩ
Table 3.19 Analog Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12
3.6.4 Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7
Parameters for set-up: 5–32 and 5–33

Number of digital outputs Output level Tolerance Max. impedance
2 0 V or 2 V DC ±4V ≥ 600Ω
Table 3.20 Digital Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7
3.6.5 Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8
Parameters for set-up: 6–6* and 16–77

Number of analog outputs Output signal level Tolerance Max. impedance
1 0/4 - 20 mA ± 0.1 mA < 500Ω
Table 3.21 Analog Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8

3.6.6 Relay Option MCB 105
130BA177.10
m
2m
The MCB 105 option includes 3 pieces of SPDT contacts
m
and must be fitted into option slot B.
9m
8-
3 3 (Resistive load) 240 V AC 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-1) 1)
Maximum terminal load (AC-15) 1) (Inductive 240 V AC 0.2 A

load @ cosφ 0.4)
Maximum terminal load (DC-1) 1) (Resistive load) 24 V DC 1 A Illustration 3.9 Wiring the Terminals
Maximum terminal load (DC-13) 1) (Inductive 24 V DC 0.1 A
load)
Minimum terminal load (DC) 5 V 10 mA
130BA176.11
1 1 1
Max switching rate at rated load/min load 6 min-1/20 s -1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Table 3.22 Electrical Data

1) IEC 947 part 4 and 5
2 2 3
When the relay option kit is ordered separately the kit
includes:
• Relay Module MCB 105 1 1 1
• Extended LCP frame and enlarged terminal cover 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
• Label for covering access to switches S201, S202,

and S801
• Cable strips for fastening cables to relay module 3 3 3
How to add the MCB 105 option:

1 1 1
• See mounting instructions in the beginning of
section Options and Accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
• The power to the live part connections on relay

terminals must be disconnected.
• Do not mix live parts with control signals (PELV). 2 2 2

Illustration 3.10 1) NC
• Select the relay functions in 5-40 Function Relay
2)Live part
[6–8], 5-41 On Delay, Relay [6–8] and 5-42 Off
3) PELV
Delay, Relay [6–8].
(Index [6] is relay 7, index [7] is relay 8, and index [8] is
relay 9)
WARNING
Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Do not combine low voltage parts and PELV systems. At a
130BA162.10
single fault, the whole system can become dangerous to

touch and it could result in death or serious injury.
NC NC NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Illustration 3.8 Wiring the Terminals

3.6.7 24 V Back-Up Option MCB 107 (Option D)
External 24 V DC Supply • Support Extended PID controllers with I/Os for set
point inputs, transmitter/sensor inputs, and
An external 24 V DC supply can be installed for low- outputs for actuators.transmitter/sensor inputs
voltage supply to the control card and any option card
installed. The external power supply enables full operation CONTROL CARD (FREQUENCY CONVERTER) 3 3
130BA405.11
of the LCP (including the parameter setting) and fieldbuses
CPU
without mains supplied to the power section.
CAN BUS
0V 24 VDC
ANALOG I/O
Input voltage range 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V in 10 s) OPTION MCB 109
Max. input current 2.2 A

CPU RTC
3V
Average input current 0.9 A LITHIUM
BATTERY
Max cable length 75 m
Input capacitance load < 10 uF
ANALOG INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT
Power-up delay < 0.6 s
GND
Table 3.23 External 24 V DC Supply Specifications
0-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
AOUT
AOUT
AOUT
AIN
AIN
AIN
The inputs are protected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Terminal numbers:
Terminal 35: - external 24 V DC supply. 0-10 0-10 0-10
VDC VDC VDC
Terminal 36: + external 24 V DC supply.
< 1 mA
< 1 mA
< 1 mA
Follow these steps:
1. Remove the LCP blind cover Pt1000/
Ni 1000
2. Remove the terminal cover
Illustration 3.11 Principle Diagram for Analog I/O Mounted in the
3. Remove the cable de-coupling plate and the
Frequency Converter
plastic cover underneath
4. Insert the 24 V DC backup external supply option
in the option slot Analog I/O configuration
5. Mount the cable de-coupling plate 3 x Analog Inputs, capable of handling following:
6. Attach the terminal cover and the LCP or blind
cover. • 0 - 10 V DC
When MCB 107, 24 V backup option is supplying the OR

control circuit, the internal 24 V supply is automatically • 0-20 mA (voltage input 0-10 V) by mounting a
disconnected. 510Ω resistor across terminals (see NOTE)
• 4-20 mA (voltage input 2-10 V) by mounting a

3.6.8 Analog I/O option MCB 109 510Ω resistor across terminals (see NOTE)
• Ni1000 temperature sensor of 1,000 Ω at 0 ° C.

The Analog I/O card is supposed to be used in the Specifications according to DIN43760
following cases:
• Pt1000 temperature sensor of 1,000Ω at 0 ° C.
• Providing battery back-up of clock function on Specifications according to IEC 60751
control card
3 x Analog Outputs supplying 0-10 V DC.
• As general extension of analog I/O selection
available on control card, for example, for multi-
zone control with three pressure transmitters
• Turning frequency converter into de-central I/O

block supporting Building Management System
with inputs for sensors and outputs for operating
dampers and valve actuators

NOTE Analog inputs - terminal X42/1-6

Note the values available within the different standard Parameter group for read out: 18-3* Analog Readouts. For
groups of resistors: more information, consult the Programming Guide.
E12: Closest standard value is 470 Ω, creating an input of
449.9 Ω and 8.997 V. Parameter groups for set-up: 26-0* Analog I/O Mode, 26-1*
Analog Input X42/1, 26-2* Analog Input X42/3 and 26-3*
3 3 E24: Closest standard value is 510 Ω, creating an input
486.4 Ω and 9.728 V.
of
Analog Input X42/5. For more information, consult the
E48: Closest standard value is 511 Ω, creating an input of Programming Guide.
487.3 Ω and 9.746 V.
E96: Closest standard value is 523 Ω, creating an input of
498.2 Ω and 9.964 V.
3 x Analog inputs Operating range Resolution Accuracy Sampling Max load Impedance
Used as -50°C to +150°C 11 bits -50 °C 3 Hz - -
temperature ±1 °K
sensor input +150 °C
±2 °K
0.2% of full
Used as +/- 20 V Approximately
0 - 10 V DC 10 bits scale at cal. 2.4 Hz
voltage input continuously 5 kΩ
temperature
Table 3.24 Analog Inputs
When used for voltage, analog inputs are scalable by The function assigned is selectable via a parameter and
parameters for each input. have same options as for analog outputs on control card.
When used for temperature sensor, analog inputs scaling is For a more detailed description of parameters, refer to the
preset to necessary signal level for specified temperature Programming Guide.
span.
Real-time clock (RTC) with back-up
When analog inputs are used for temperature sensors, it is The data format of RTC includes year, month, date, hour,
possible to read out feedback value in both °C and °F. minutes, and weekday.
When operating with temperature sensors, maximum cable Accuracy of clock is better than ± 20 ppm at 25 °C.
length to connect sensors is 80 m non-screened/non-
twisted wires. The built-in lithium back-up battery lasts on average for
minimum 10 years, when the frequency converter is
Analog outputs - terminal X42/7-12 operating at 40 °C ambient temperature. If battery pack
Parameter group for read out and write: 18-3*. For more back-up fails, analog I/O option must be exchanged.
information, consult the Programming Guide.
Cascade control is a common control system used to
Parameter groups for set-up: 26-4* Analog Out X42/7, 26-5*
control parallel pumps or fans in an energy efficient way.
Analog Out X42/9 and 26-6* Analog Out X42/11. For more
information, consult the Programming Guide.
The cascade controller option provides the capability to
control multiple pumps configured in parallel in a way that
3 x Analog Output Resolution Linearity Max load
makes them appear as a single larger pump.
outputs signal level
Volt 0-10V DC 11 bits 1% of full 1 mA
To satisfy the required system output for flow or pressure
scale
when using cascade controllers, the individual pumps are
Table 3.25 Analog Outputs automatically turned on (staged) and turned off (de-
staged) as needed. The speed of pumps connected to
Analog outputs are scalable by parameters for each VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 is also controlled to provide a
output. continuous range of system output.

the frequency converter and an additional 3 relays are

found on the option card MCO 101 or 8 relays and 7
digital inputs on option card MCO 102.
The difference between MCO 101 and MCO 102 is mainly

the number of optional relays being made available for the
frequency converter. When MCO 102 is installed, the relays 3 3
option card MCB 105 can be mounted in the B-slot.
Illustration 3.12 Cascade Control of Multiple Pumps

The cascade controller can control a mix of variable speed
and fixed speed pumps. Possible configurations are
described in more detail in 3.6.9 General Description. For
simplicity of description within this manual, pressure and
The cascade controllers are optional hardware and
flow are used to describe the variable output of the set of
software components that can be added to the VLT®
pumps controlled by the cascade controller.
AQUA Drive FC 202. It consists of an option board
containing three relays that is installed in the B option
location on the drive. Once options are installed, the 3.6.9 General Description
parameters to support the cascade controller functions are
available through the control panel in parameter group 27- The cascade controller software runs from a single VLT®
** Extended Cascade Control. The extended cascade AQUA Drive FC 202 with the cascade controller option
controller offers more functionality than the basic cascade card installed. This frequency converter is referred to as the
controller. It can be used to extend the basic cascade with master drive. It controls a set of pumps each controlled by
three relays and even to eight relays with the advanced a frequency converter or connected directly to mains
cascade control card installed. through a contactor or through a soft starter.
While the cascade controller is designed for pumping Each additional frequency converter in the system is
applications and this document describes the cascade referred to as a follower drive. These frequency converters
controller for this application, it is also possible to use the do not need the cascade controller option card installed.
cascade controllers for any application requiring multiple They are operated in open loop mode and receive their
motors configured in parallel. speed reference from the master drive. The pumps
connected to these frequency converters are referred to as
Master/follower operation variable speed pumps
The cascade controller software runs from a single VLT
AQUA Drive with the cascade controller option card Each additional pump connected to mains through a
installed. This frequency converter is referred to as the contactor or through a soft starter is referred to as a fixed
master drive. It controls a set of pumps each controlled by speed pump.
a frequency converter or connected directly to mains
through a contactor or through a soft starter. Each pump, variable speed or fixed speed, responds to a
relay in the Master Drive. The frequency converter with the
Each additional frequency converter in the system is Cascade Controller option card installed has five relays
referred to as a follower drive. These frequency converters available for controlling pumps. Two relays are standard in
do not need the cascade controller option card installed. the frequency converter and an additional 3 relays are
They are operated in open loop mode and receive their found on the option card MCO 101 or 8 relays and 7
speed reference from the master drive. The pumps digital inputs on option card MCO 102.
connected to these frequency converters are referred to as
variable speed pumps. The difference between MCO 101 and MCO 102 is mainly
the number of optional relays being made available for the
Each additional pump connected to mains through a frequency converter. When MCO 102 is installed, the relays
contactor or through a soft starter is referred to as a fixed option card MCB 105 can be mounted in the B-slot.
speed pump.
The cascade controller can control a mix of variable speed
Each pump, variable speed or fixed speed, responds to a and fixed speed pumps. Possible configurations are
relay in the master drive. The frequency converter with the described in more detail in the next section. For simplicity
cascade controller option card installed has five relays of description within this manual, pressure and flow are
available for controlling pumps. Two relays are standard in used to describe the variable output of the set of pumps
controlled by the cascade controller.

3.6.10 Extended Cascade Controller MCO
130BA177.10
m
101
2m
m
The MCO 101 option includes 3 pieces of change-over
9m
8-
contacts and can be fitted into option slot B.
3 3 Maximum terminal load (AC) 240 V AC 2 A

Maximum terminal load (DC) 24 V DC 1 A
Minimum terminal load (DC) 5 V 10 mA Illustration 3.14 Wiring the Terminals
Maximum switching rate at rated load/min load 6 min-1/20 s-1
Table 3.26 Electrical Data
130BA176.11
1 1 1
WARNING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Warning Dual supply
NOTE 2 2 3
Place the label on the LCP frame as shown (UL approved).

1 1 1
How to add the MCO 101 option:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
• The power to the frequency converter must be
disconnected.
• The power to the live part connections on relay

terminals must be disconnected. 3 3 3
• Remove the LCP, the terminal cover, and the

1 1 1
cradle from the FC 202.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
• Fit the MCO 101 option in slot B.
• Connect the control cables and relief the cables

by the enclosed cable strips.
2 2 2
• Various systems must not be mixed. Illustration 3.15 Terminals
• Fit the extended cradle and terminal cover.
• Replace the LCP

1 NC
• Connect power to the frequency converter.
2 Live part
Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12
130BA606.10
3 PELV
NC NC NC WARNING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Do not combine low voltage parts and PELV systems.
3.6.11 Brake Resistors

Illustration 3.13 Wiring the Terminals
In applications where the motor is used as a brake, energy

is generated in the motor and send back into the
frequency converter. If the energy cannot be transported
back to the motor, it increases the voltage in the converter
DC-line. In applications with frequent braking and/or high
inertia loads, this increase leads to an over voltage trip in
the converter and finally a shutdown. Brake resistors are
used to dissipate the excess energy resulting from the
regenerative braking. The resistor is selected in respect to
its ohmic value, its power dissipation rate, and its physical

size. Danfoss offers a wide variety of different resistors that
130BA200.10
are specially designed to our frequency converters. See
2.13 Control with Brake Function for the dimensioning of
brake resistors. Code numbers can be found in 4 How to
Order.
3.6.12 Remote Mounting Kit for LCP 3 3

The LCP can be moved to the front of a cabinet by using
the remote built-in kit. The enclosure is IP66. The fastening
screws must be tightened with a torque of max. 1 Nm.
Enclosure IP66 front

Max. cable length between and unit 3m
Communication std RS-485
Illustration 3.18 LCP Kit with Numerical LCP, Fasteners, and
Table 3.28 Technical Data Gasket.
Ordering No. 130B1114
64,5± 0.5 mm
130BA139.11
(2.54± 0.04 in)
3.6.13 Input Filters

)
(0.08
x R2 The 6-pulse diode rectifier causes the harmonic current
Ma
distortion. The harmonic currents affect the installed serial
Min 72(2.8)
129,5± 0.5 mm
equipment identical to reactive currents. Consequently,

(5.1± 0.04 in)
harmonic current distortion can result in overheating of

Panel the supply transformer, cables and so on. Depending on
cut out
the impedance of the power grid, harmonic current
distortion can lead to voltage distortion also affecting
other equipment powered by the same transformer.
Voltage distortion is increasing losses, causes premature
Illustration 3.16 aging and worst of all erratic operation. The built-in DC
coil reduces most harmonics, but if more reduction is
needed, Danfoss offers two types of passive filters.
LCP Kits
130BA138.10
The Danfoss AHF 005 and AHF 010 are advanced harmonic
filters, not to be compared with traditional harmonic trap
filters. The Danfoss harmonic filters have been specially
designed to match the Danfoss frequency converters.
AHF 010 is reducing the harmonic currents to less than

10% and the AHF 005 is reducing harmonic currents to
less than 5% at 2% background distortion and 2%
imbalance.
3.6.14 Output Filters
The high-speed switching of the frequency converter

produces some secondary effects, which influence the
motor and the enclosed environment. Two different filter
Illustration 3.17 LCP Kit with Graphical LCP, Fasteners, 3 m
types, the dU/dt and the Sine-wave filters, are in place to
Cable, and Gasket.
address these side effects.
Ordering No. 130B1113

dU/dt filters 3.7.1 Installation of Back Channel Cooling

The combination of rapid voltage and current increase Kit in Rittal Enclosures
cause motor insulation stresses. The rapid energy changes
can also be reflected back to the DC-line in the inverter This section describes the installation of IP00/IP20/chassis
and cause shut down. The dU/dt filter is designed to frequency converters with back channel cooling kits in
reduce the voltage rise time/the rapid energy change in Rittal enclosures. In addition to the enclosure, a floor
3 3 the motor and by that intervention avoid premature aging mounting pedestal is required.
and flashover in the motor insulation. dU/dt filters have a
positive influence on the radiation of magnetic noise in
176FA252.10
the cable that connects the frequency converter to the
motor. The voltage wave form is still pulse shaped, but the
dU/dt ratio is reduced in comparison with the installation
without filter.
Sine-wave filters
Sine-wave filters are designed to let only low frequencies
pass. High frequencies are shunted away which results in a
sinusoidal phase to phase voltage waveform and sinusoidal
current waveforms.
With the sinusoidal waveforms, the use of special
frequency converter motors with reinforced insulation is no
longer needed. The acoustic noise from the motor is also
damped as a consequence of the wave condition.
Besides the features of the dU/dt filter, the sine-wave filter
also reduces insulation stress and bearing currents in the
motor thus leading to prolonged motor lifetime and longer
periods between services. Sine-wave filters enable use of
longer motor cables in applications where the motor is
installed far from the frequency converter. The length is
unfortunately limited because the filter does not reduce
leakage currents in the cables.
3.7 High Power Options
CAUTION
A door fan is required on the enclosure to remove the
heat losses not contained in the back channel of the
frequency converter and any additional losses generated
from other components installed inside the enclosure. The
total required air flow must be calculated so that the
appropriate fans can be selected. Some enclosure
manufacturers offer software for performing the
calculations (that is, Rittal Therm software). If the frequency
converter is the only heat generating component in the
enclosure, the minimum airflow required at an ambient
temperature of 45°C for the D3h and D4h frequency
converter is 391 m3/h (230 cfm). The minimum airflow
required at an ambient temperature of 45°C for the E2
frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm).
Illustration 3.19 Installation of IP00/IP20/Chassis in Rittal TS8

Enclosure.

The minimum enclosure dimension is: for details). The cooling kits listed in Table 3.29 are suitable
• D3h frame: Depth 500 mm and width 400 mm for use only with IP00/IP20 chassis frequency converters in
Rittal TS8 IP 20 and UL and NEMA 1 and IP 54 and UL and
• D4h frame: Depth 500 mm and width 600 mm.
NEMA 12 enclosures.
• E2 frame: Depth 600 mm and width 800 mm.
The maximum depth and width must comply with the
installation requirements. When using multiple frequency
CAUTION 3 3
converters in one enclosure, mount each on its own back For the E2 frames, it is important to mount the plate at the
panel and support each along the mid-section of the absolute rear of the Rittal enclosure due to the weight of
panel. The back channel cooling kits do not support the the frequency converter.
“in frame” mounting of the panel (see Rittal TS8 catalogue
Rittal TS-8 Enclosure Frame D3h Kit Part No. Frame D4hKit Part No. Frame E2 Part No.
1,800 mm 176F3625 176F3628 Not possible
2,000 mm 176F3629 176F3630 176F1850
2,200 mm 176F0299
Table 3.29 Ordering Information
See the Duct Kit Instruction Manual, 175R5640, for further

information regarding the E-frame kit.
External ducts
If more duct work is added externally to the Rittal cabinet
the pressure drop in the ducting must be calculated. See
5.2.7 Cooling and Airflow for further information.

3.7.2 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for Frame Size Part Number Instruction Number
Rittal Enclosures D3h 176F3633 177R0460
D4h 176F3634 177R0461
E2 176F1852 176R5922
130BB518.10
Table 3.30 NEMA-3R Kit Ordering Information
3 3
3.7.3 Installation on Pedestal
This section describes the installation of a pedestal unit

available for the frequency converters frames D1h, D2h,
D5h, and D6h. The pedestal allows these frequency
converters to be floor mounted. The front of the pedestal
has openings for input air to the power components.
The frequency converter gland plate must be installed to

provide adequate cooling air to the control components of
the frequency converter and to maintain the IP21 (NEMA
1) or IP54 (NEMA 12) enclosure ratings.
175ZT976.10
Illustration 3.20 Cutaway Side View of Cabinet
This section is for the installation of NEMA 3R kits available

for the frequency converter frames D3h, D4h and E2. These
kits are designed and tested to be used with IP00/IP20/
Chassis versions of these frames in Rittal TS8 NEMA 3R or
NEMA 4 enclosures. The NEMA-3R enclosure is an outdoor
enclosure that provides a degree of protection against rain
and ice. The NEMA-4 enclosure is an outdoor enclosure
that provides a greater degree of protection against
weather and hosed water.
The minimum enclosure depth is 500 mm (600 mm for E2
frame) and the kit is designed for a 600 mm (800 mm for
E2 frame) wide enclosure. Other enclosure widths are
possible, however more Rittal hardware is required. Consult
the installation requirements for the maximum depth and
width.
NOTE
The current rating of frequency converters in D3h and D4h
frames are de-rated by 3%, when adding the NEMA 3R kit.
Frequency converters in E2 frames require no derating.
Illustration 3.21 Frequency Converter Mounted on a Pedestal

The ordering numbers and heights for the pedestals are

shown in Table 3.31
Frame Size Part Number Instruction Number Height [mm]

D1h 176F3631 177R0452 400
D2h
D5h/D6h
176F3632
176F3452
177R0453
177R0500
400
200 3 3
D7h/D8h Included with unit Included with unit 200
E1 Included with unit Included with unit 200
Table 3.31 Pedestal Ordering Information
176FA242.10
Illustration 3.22 Mounting of the Frequency Converter to the

Pedestal

3.7.4 Installation of Input Plate Options
This section is for the field installation of input option kits for E-frame frequency converters.
Do not attempt to remove RFI filters from input plates. Removal of RFI filters from the input plates can cause damage.
3 3 NOTE
Where RFI filters are available, there are two different types of RFI filters depending on the input plate combination and the
RFI filters interchangeable. Field installable kits in certain cases are the same for all voltages.
380-480 V [kW] Fuses Disconnect Fuses RFI RFI Fuses RFI Disconnect
380-500 V [kW] Fuses
E1 FC102/FC202: 315 176F0253 176F0255 176F0257 176F0258 176F0260
FC302: 250
FC102/FC202: 355–450 176F0254 176F0256 176F0257 176F0259 176F0262
FC302: 315–400
Table 3.32 Input Options
525-690 V [kW] Fuses Disconnect Fuses RFI RFI Fuses RFI Disconnect
Fuses
E1 FC102/FC202: 450-500 176F0253 176F0255 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
FC302: 355-400
FC102/FC202: 560–630 176F0254 176F0258 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
FC302: 500–560
Table 3.33 Input Options
NOTE installed to maintain the IP20 rating of the enclosure.

For further information, see the Instruction Sheet, Illustration 3.23 shows both the covered and uncovered
175R5795 terminals.
130BC547.10
3.7.5 Installation of Mains Shield for
Frequency Converters
This section is for the installation of a mains shield for the

frequency converter. It is not possible to install in the IP00/
Chassis versions as these enclosures include a standard a
metal cover. These shields satisfy VBG-4 requirements.
Ordering numbers: Illustration 3.23 Load Share or Regeneration Terminal with Cover
Frame E1: 176F1851 (L) and without Cover (R)
NOTE
For further information, see the Instruction Sheet, 3.7.6.2 Regeneration Terminals
175R5923
Regen (regeneration) terminals can be supplied for
applications that have a regenerative load. A regenerative
3.7.6 D-frame Options unit, supplied by a third party, connects to the regen
terminals so that power can be regenerated back onto the
3.7.6.1 Load Share Terminals mains, resulting in energy savings. Regen terminals are
available in IP20 frequency converters and extend out the
Load share terminals enable the connection of the DC top of the frequency converter. A terminal cover, supplied
circuits of several frequency converters. Load share with the frequency converter, must be installed to
terminals are available in IP20 frequency converters and maintain the IP20 rating of the enclosure. Illustration 3.23
extend out the top of the frequency converter. A terminal shows both the covered and uncovered terminals.
cover, supplied with the frequency converter, must be

3.7.6.3 Anti-Condensation Heater Voltage Frequency converter Disconnect manufacturer

model and type
An anti-condensation heater can be installed inside the 380–500 V N110T5–N160T4 ABB OT400U03
frequency converter to prevent condensation from forming N200T5–N315T4 ABB OT600U03
inside the enclosure when the unit is turned off. Customer- 525–690 V N75KT7–N160T7 ABB OT400U03
supplied 230 V AC controls the heater. For best results,
3 3
N200T7–N400T7 ABB OT600U03
operate the heater only when the unit is not running and
turn off the heater when the unit is running. Table 3.34 Mains Disconnect Information
A 2.5 amp time-delay fuse, such as the Bussmann

LPJ-21/2SP, is recommended to protect the heater. 3.7.6.9 Contactor
A customer-supplied 230 V AC 50/60 Hz signal powers the

3.7.6.4 Brake Chopper
contactor.
A brake chopper can be supplied for applications that Voltage Frequency Contactor IEC utilisation
have a regenerative load. The brake chopper connects to a converter model manufacturer and category
brake resistor, which consumes the braking energy, type
preventing an overvoltage fault on the DC bus. The 380–500 V N110T5–N160T4 GE CK95BE311N AC-3
braking chopper is automatically activated when the DC N200T5–N250T4 GE CK11CE311N AC-3
bus voltage exceeds a specified level, depending on the N315T4 GE CK11CE311N AC-1
nominal voltage of the frequency converter. 525–690 V N75KT7–N160T7 GE CK95BE311N AC-3
N200T7–N400T7 GE CK11CE311N AC-3
3.7.6.5 Mains Shield
Table 3.35 Contactor Information
The mains shield is a Lexan cover installed inside the

enclosure to provide protection according to VBG-4
NOTE
accident-prevention requirements. In applications requiring UL listing, when the frequency
converter is supplied with a contactor, the customer must
provide external fusing to maintain the UL rating of the
3.7.6.6 Ruggedized Printed Circuit Boards frequency converter and a short circuit current rating of
100,000 A. See 5.3.8 Fuse Specifications for fuse recommen-
Ruggedized boards are available for marine and other dations.
applications that experience higher than average vibration.
NOTE 3.7.6.10 Circuit Breaker

Ruggedized boards are required for the D-Frame frequency
converters to meet marine approval requirements. Table 3.36 provides details on the type of circuit breaker
provided as an option with the various units and power
3.7.6.7 Heat Sink Access Panel ranges.
Voltage Frequency converter Circuit breaker manufacturer
An optional heat sink access panel is available to facilitate model and type
cleaning of the heat sink. Debris buildup is typical in 380–500 V N110T5–N132T5 ABB T5L400TW
environments prone to airborne contaminants, such as the N160T5 ABB T5LQ400TW
textile industry. N200T5 ABB T6L600TW
N250T5 ABB T6LQ600TW
3.7.6.8 Mains Disconnect N315T5 ABB T6LQ800TW
525–690 V N75KT7–N160T7 ABB T5L400TW
The disconnect option is available in both varieties of N200T7–N315T7 ABB T6L600TW
option cabinets. The position of the disconnect changes N400T7 ABB T6LQ600TW
based on the size of the options cabinet and whether
other options are present. Table 3.34 provides more detail Table 3.36 Circuit Breaker Information
about which disconnects are used.
3.7.7 Frame Size F Options
Space Heaters and Thermostat

Mounted on the cabinet interior of frame size F frequency
converters, space heaters controlled via automatic
thermostat help control humidity inside the enclosure,

extending the lifetime of components in damp • LED bar graph indicator of the ground fault
environments. The thermostat default settings turn on the current level from 10–100% of the set-point
heaters at 10 °C (50 °F) and turn them off at 15.6 °C (60
• Fault memory
°F).
• [Test/Reset] key
Cabinet Light with Power Outlet
Insulation Resistance Monitor (IRM)
3 3 A light mounted on the cabinet interior of frame size F
frequency converters increases visibility during servicing Monitors the insulation resistance in ungrounded systems
and maintenance. The housing includes a power outlet for (IT systems in IEC terminology) between the system phase
temporarily powering tools or other devices, available in conductors and ground. There is an ohmic pre-warning
two voltages: and a main alarm set-point for the insulation level.
Associated with each set-point is an SPDT alarm relay for
• 230 V, 50 Hz, 2.5A, CE/ENEC external use.
• 120 V, 60 Hz, 5A, UL/cUL
NOTE
Transformer Tap Setup Only one insulation resistance monitor can be connected
If the cabinet light & outlet and/or the space heaters & to each ungrounded (IT) system.
thermostat are installed, Transformer T1 requires that taps
be set to the proper input voltage. A 380-480/500 V
frequency converter is initially set to the 525 V tap and a
• Integrated into the safe-stop circuit of the
frequency converter
525–690 V frequency converter is set to the 690 V tap to
ensure no over-voltage of secondary equipment occurs if • LCD display of the ohmic value of the insulation
the tap is not changed before power is applied. See resistance
Table 3.37 to set the proper tap on TB3 located in the • Fault Memory
rectifier cabinet. For location in the frequency converter,
see 5.4.2 Power Connections.
• [Info], [Test] and [Reset] keys
IEC Emergency Stop with Pilz Safety Relay
Input voltage range [V] Tap to select [V] Includes a redundant 4-wire emergency-stop push button
380-440 400 mounted on the front of the enclosure and a Pilz relay that
441-490 460 monitors it with the safe-stop circuit and the mains
491-550 525 contactor located in the options cabinet.
551-625 575 Safe Stop + Pilz Relay
626-660 660 Provides a solution for the "Emergency Stop" option
661-690 690 without the contactor in F-Frame frequency converters.
Table 3.37 Transformer Tap Manual Motor Starters

Provides 3-phase power for electric blowers often required
NAMUR Terminals for larger motors. Power for the starters is provided from
NAMUR is an international association of automation the load side of any supplied contactor, circuit breaker, or
technology users in the process industries, primarily disconnect switch. Power is fused before each motor
chemical and pharmaceutical industries in Germany. starter, and is off when the incoming power to the
Selection of this option provides terminals organised and frequency converter is off. Up to two starters are allowed
labelled to the specifications of the NAMUR standard for (one if a 30 A, fuse-protected circuit is ordered) and are
drive input and output terminals, which requires MCB 112 integrated into the safe-stop circuit.
PTC thermistor card and MCB 113 extended relay card. Unit features include:
RCD (Residual Current Device) • Operation switch (on/off)

Uses the core balance method to monitor ground fault • Short-circuit and overload protection with test
currents in grounded and high-resistance grounded function
systems (TN and TT systems in IEC terminology). There is a
pre-warning (50% of main alarm set-point) and a main • Manual reset function
alarm set-point. Associated with each set-point is an SPDT 30 A, Fuse-Protected Terminals

alarm relay for external use. The RCD requires an external
• 3-phase power matching incoming mains voltage
“window-type” current transformer (supplied and installed for powering auxiliary customer equipment
by the customer).
• Not available if two manual motor starters are
• Integrated into the safe-stop circuit of the selected
frequency converter
• Terminals are off when the incoming power to
• IEC 60755 Type B device monitors AC, pulsed DC, the frequency converter is off
and pure DC ground fault currents

• Power for the fused protected terminals is

provided from the load side of any supplied
contactor, circuit breaker, or disconnect switch.
24 V DC Power Supply
• 5 A, 120 W, 24 V DC
• Protected against output over-current, overload, 3 3

short circuits, and over-temperature
• For powering customer-supplied accessory

devices such as sensors, PLC I/O, contactors,
temperature probes, indicator lights, and/or other
electronic hardware
• Diagnostics include a dry DC-ok contact, a green

DC-ok LED, and a red overload LED
External Temperature Monitoring
Designed for monitoring temperatures of external system
components, such as the motor windings and/or bearings.
Includes five universal input modules. The modules are
integrated into the safe-stop circuit (requires purchase of
safe-stop) and can be monitored via a fieldbus network
(requires the purchase of a separate module/bus coupler).
Universal inputs (5)
Signal types:
• RTD inputs (including PT100), 3-wire or 4-wire
• Thermocouple
• Analog current or analog voltage

Additional features:
• One universal output, configurable for analog
voltage or analog current
• Two output relays (N.O.)
• Dual-line LC display and LED diagnostics
• Sensor lead wire break, short-circuit, and incorrect

polarity detection
• Interface setup software

How to Order VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
4 How to Order
4.1 Ordering Form

4.1.1 Drive Configurator
It is possible to design a VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 frequency converter according to the application requirements by using
4 4 the ordering number system.
To order standard frequency converters and frequency converters with integral options, send a type code string describing
the product to the Danfoss sales office. An example type code:
FC-202N132T4E21H2XGCXXXSXXXXAXBKCXXXXDX
The meaning of the characters in the string can be located in the pages containing the ordering numbers in 4.1 Ordering
Form. In the example above, a Profibus LON works option and a General purpose I/O option is included in the frequency
converter.
Ordering numbers for VLT AQUA Drive standard variants can also be located in the chapter 4.2 Ordering Numbers.
Use the web-based Drive Configurator, to configure the right frequency converter for the right application and generate the
type code string. The Drive Configurator automatically generates an eight-digit sales number for the local sales office.
Furthermore,it´s possible to establish a project list with several products and send it to a Danfoss sales representative.
The Drive Configurator can be found on the global internet site: www.danfoss.com/drives.
NOTE
Type code information includes frame sizes A, B and C. For detailed information on these products, reference the relevant
design guide.

4.1.2 Type Code String
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
130BC529.10
F C - 2 0 2 T H X X S X X X X A B C D
Illustration 4.1 Type Code
Description Position Possible Choice 4 4

Product Group 1–3 FC
Drive Series 4–6 202
Generation Code 7 N
Power Rating 8–10 75–400 kW
Mains Voltage 11–12 T4: 380–480 V AC
T7: 525–690 V AC
Enclosure 13–15 E20: IP20 (chassis - for installation in external enclosure)
E21: IP21 (NEMA 1)
E54: IP54 (NEMA 12)
E2M: IP21 (NEMA 1) with mains shield
E5M: IP54 (NEMA 12) with mains shield
C20: IP20 (chassis - for installation in external enclosure) + stainless steel back
channel
H21: IP21 (NEMA 1) + heater
H54: IP54 (NEMA 12) + heater
RFI filter 16–17 H2: RFI filter, class A2 (standard)
H4: RFI filter class A11)
Brake 18 X: No brake IGBT
B: Brake IGBT mounted
T: Safe stop
U: Brake chopper + safe stop
R: Regeneration terminals
S: Brake + regeneration (IP 20 only)
Display 19 G: Graphical local control panel
N: Numerical local control panel
X: No local control panel
Coating PCB 20 C: Coated PCB
R: Ruggedized PCB
Mains Option 21 X: No mains option
3: Mains disconnect and fuse
4: Mains contactor + fuses
7: Fuse
A: Fuse and load sharing (IP20 only)
D: Load share terminals (IP20 only)
E: Mains disconnect + contactor + fuses
J: Circuit breaker + fuses
Adaptation 22 X: Standard cable entries
Q: Heatsink access panel
Adaptation 23 X: No adaptation
Software release 24–27 Actual software
Software language 28
The various options are described further in this Design Guide.
1): Available for all D frames.
Table 4.1 Ordering Type Code for D-frame Frequency Converters

Description Pos Possible choice

Product group 1–3 FC
Drive series 4–6 202
Power rating 8–10 450–630 kW
Phases 11 Three phases (T)
Mains voltage 11- T 4: 380–500 VAC
12 T 7: 525–690 VAC
Enclosure 13- E00: IP00/Chassis - for installation in external enclosure
4 4 15 C00: IP00/Chassis (for installation in external enclosure) w/ stainless steel back

channel
E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1
E54: IP 54/NEMA Type 12
E2M: IP 21/NEMA Type 1 with mains shield
E5M: IP 54/NEMA Type 12 with mains shield
RFI filter 16- H2: RFI filter, class A2 (standard)
17 H4: RFI filter class A11)
Brake 18 B: Brake IGBT mounted
X: No brake IGBT
Display 19 G: Graphical Local Control Panel LCP
N: Numerical Local Control Panel (LCP)
X: No Local Control Panel (D frames IP00 and IP 21 only)
Mains option 21 X: No mains option
3: Mains disconnect and Fuse
5: Mains disconnect, Fuse, and Load sharing
7: Fuse
A: Fuse and Load sharing
D: Load sharing
Adaptation 22 Reserved
Adaptation 23 Reserved
Software release 24- Actual software
27
Software language 28
A options 29–30 AX: No options
A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1
A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet
AN: MCA 121 Ethernet IP
B options 31–32 BX: No option
BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option
BP: MCB 105 Relay option
BO:MCB 109 Analogue I/O option
BY: MCO 101 Extended Cascade Control
C0 options 33–34 CX: No options
C1 options 35 X: No options
5: MCO 102 Advanced Cascade Control
C option software 36–37 XX: Standard software
D options 38–39 DX: No option
D0: DC backup
1): Available for all E frames 380-480/500 VAC only
2) Consult factory for applications requiring maritime certification
Table 4.2 Ordering Type Code for E-Frame Frequency Converters

Description Pos Possible choice

Product group 1–3 FC
Drive series 4–6 202
Power rating 8–10 500–1200 kW
Mains voltage 11- T 4: 380–480 V AC
12 T 7: 525–690 V AC
Enclosure 13- E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1
15 E54: IP 54/NEMA Type 12
4 4
L2X: IP21/NEMA 1 with cabinet light & IEC 230 V power outlet
L5X: IP54/NEMA 12 with cabinet light & IEC 230 V power outlet
L2A: IP21/NEMA 1 with cabinet light & NAM 115 V power outlet
L5A: IP54/NEMA 12 with cabinet light & NAM 115 V power outlet
H21: IP21 with space heater and thermostat
H54: IP54 with space heater and thermostat
R2X: IP21/NEMA1 with space heater, thermostat, light & IEC 230 V outlet
R5X: IP54/NEMA12 with space heater, thermostat, light & IEC 230 V outlet
R2A: IP21/NEMA1 with space heater, thermostat, light, & NAM 115 V outlet
R5A: IP54/NEMA12 with space heater, thermostat, light, & NAM 115 V outlet
RFI filter 16- B2: 12-pulse with class A2 RFI
17 BE: 12-pulse with RCD/A2 RFI
BH: 12-pulse with IRM/A1 RFI
BG: 12-pulse with IRM/A2 RFI
B4: 12-pulse with class A1 RFI
BF: 12-pulse with RCD/A1 RFI
BH: 12-pulse with IRM/A1 RFI
H2: RFI filter, class A2 (standard)
H4: RFI filter, class A12, 3)
HE: RCD with Class A2 RFI filter2)
HF: RCD with class A1 RFI filter2, 3)
HG: IRM with Class A2 RFI filter2)
HH: IRM with class A1 RFI filter2, 3)
HJ: NAMUR terminals and class A2 RFI filter1)
HK: NAMUR terminals with class A1 RFI filter1, 2, 3)
HL: RCD with NAMUR terminals and class A2 RFI filter1, 2)
HM: RCD with NAMUR terminals and class A1 RFI filter1, 2, 3)
HN: IRM with NAMUR terminals and class A2 RFI filter1, 2)
HP: IRM with NAMUR terminals and class A1 RFI filter1, 2, 3)
Brake 18 B: Brake IGBT-mounted
C: Safe stop with Pilz safety relay
D: Safe stop with Pilz safety relay and brake IGBT
E: Safe stop with Pilz safety relay and regeneration terminals
X: No brake IGBT
M: IEC Emergency stop push-button (with Pilz safety relay)4)
N: IEC Emergency stop push button with brake IGBT and brake terminals 4)
P: IEC Emergency stop push button with regeneration terminals4)

Display 19 G: Graphical Local Control Panel LCP

Mains option 21 X: No mains option

7: Fuse
32): Mains disconnect and fuse
52): Mains disconnect, fuse, and load sharing
A: Fuse and Load sharing
D: Load sharing
E: Mains disconnect, contactor & fuses2)
F: Mains circuit breaker, contactor & fuses 2)
4 4
G: Mains disconnect, contactor, loadsharing terminals & fuses2)
H: Mains circuit breaker, contactor, loadsharing terminals & fuses2)
J: Mains circuit breaker & fuses 2)
K: Mains circuit breaker, loadsharing terminals & fuses 2)
A options 29–30 AX: No options

A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1
A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet
AN: MCA 121 Ethernet IP
B options 31–32 BX: No option
BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option
BP: MCB 105 Relay option
BO:MCB 109 Analogue I/O option
BY: MCO 101 Extended Cascade Control
C0 options 33–34 CX: No options
C1 options 35 X: No options
5: MCO 102 Advanced Cascade Control
C option software 36–37 XX: Standard software
D options 38–39 DX: No option
D0: DC backup
Table 4.3 Ordering Type Code for F-Frame Frequency Converters

4.2 Ordering Numbers

4.2.1 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories
Type Description Ordering no.

Miscellaneous hardware
Profibus D-Sub 9 Connector kit for IP20 130B1112
MCF 103 USB Cable 350 mm, IP55/66 130B1155
MCF 103
Terminal blocks
USB Cable 650 mm, IP55/66
Screw terminal blocks for replacing spring loaded terminals
130B1156
4 4
1 pc 10 pin 1 pc 6 pin and 1 pc 3 pin connectors 130B1116
LCP
LCP 101 Numerical Local Control Panel (NLCP) 130B1124
LCP 102 Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP) 130B1107
LCP cable Separate LCP cable, 3 m 175Z0929
LCP kit Panel mounting kit including graphical LCP, fasteners, 3 m cable and 130B1113
gasket
LCP kit Panel mounting kit including numerical LCP, fasteners and gasket 130B1114
LCP kit Panel mounting kit for all LCPs including fasteners, 3 m cable and 130B1117
gasket
LCP kit Panel mounting kit for all LCPs including fasteners and gasket - 130B1170
without cable
LCP kit Panel mounting kit for all LCPs including fasteners, 8 m cable, glands 130B1129
and gasket for IP55/66 enclosures
Options for Slot A Uncoated/Coated Uncoated Coated
MCA 101 Profibus option DP V0/V1 130B1100 130B1200
MCA 104 DeviceNet option 130B1102 130B1202
MCA 108 LON works 130B1106 130B1206
Options for Slot B
MCB 101 General purpose Input Output option 130B1125 130B1212
MCB 105 Relay option 130B1110 130B1210
MCB 109 Analog I/O option 130B1143 130B1243
MCB 114 PT 100 / PT 1000 sensor input 130B1172 10B1272
MCO 101 Extended Cascade Control 130B1118 130B1218
Option for Slot C
MCO 102 Advanced Cascade Control 130B1154 130B1254
Option for Slot D
MCB 107 24 V DC back-up 130B1108 130B1208
Table 4.4 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories

Type Description Ordering no.

External Options
Ethernet IP Ethernet 130B1119 130B1219
Spare Parts
Control board VLT® AQUA With Safe Stop Function 130B1167
Drive FC 202
Control board VLT® AQUA Without Safe Stop Function 130B1168
DriveFC 202
4 4 Accessory bag Control

Terminals
130B0295
1) Only IP21/> 11 kW
Table 4.5 Ordering Numbers: Options and Accessories
Options can be ordered as factory built-in options, see ordering information.

For information on fieldbus and application option compatibility with older software versions, contact your Danfoss supplier.
4.2.2 Ordering Numbers: Advanced Harmonic Filters
Harmonic filters are used to reduce mains harmonics.
For detailed information on advanced harmonic filters, see

the AHF design guide
• AHF 010: 10% current distortion
• AHF 005: 5% current distortion
Code Code Filter current Typical VLT model and current Losses Acoustic
Frame size
number number rating motor ratings AHF005 AHF010 noise
AHF005 AHF010
IP00 IP00 [A] [kW] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBA] AHF005 AHF010
IP20 IP20
130B1446 130B1295 204 110 N110 204 1080 742 <75 X6 X6
130B1251 130B1214
130B1447 130B1369 251 132 N132 251 1195 864 <75 X7 X7
130B1258 130B1215
130B1448 130B1370 304 160 N160 304 1288 905 <75 X7 X7
130B1259 130B1216
130B3153 130B3151 325 1406 952 <75 X8 X7
Paralleling for 355 kW
130B3152 130B3136
130B1449 130B1389 381 200 N200 381 1510 1175 <77 X8 X7
130B1260 130B1217
130B1469 130B1391 480 250 N250 472 1852 1542 <77 X8 X8
130B1261 130B1228
2x130B1448 2x130B1370 608 315 N315 590 2576 1810 <80
2x130B1259 2x130B1216
Table 4.6 Advanced Harmonic Filters 380-415 V, 50 Hz, D-Frame

Code number Code number Filter Losses

Typical VLT model and Acousti
AHF005 AHF010 current Frame size
motor current ratings AHF005 AHF010 c noise
IP00 IP00 rating
2x130B3153 2x130B3151 650 355 P355 647 2812 1904 <80
2x130B3152 2x130B3136
130B1448+130B1449 130B1370+130B1389 685 400 P400 684 2798 2080 <80
130B1259+130B1260 130B1216+130B1217
4 4
2x130B1449 2x130B1389 762 450 P450 779 3020 2350 <80
2x130B1260 2x130B1217
130B1449+130B1469 130B1389+130B1391 861 500 P500 857 3362 2717 <80
130B1260+130B1261 130B1217+130B1228
2x130B1469 2x130B1391 960 560 P560 964 3704 3084 <80
2x130B1261 2x130B1228
3x130B1449 3x130B1389 1140 630 P630 1090 4530 3525 <80
3x130B1260 3x130B1217
2x130B1449+130B1469 2x130B1389+130B1391 1240 710 P710 1227 4872 3892 <80
2x130B1260+130B1261 2x130B1217+130B1228
3x130B1469 3x130B1391 1440 800 P800 1422 5556 4626 <80
3x1301261 3x130B1228
2x130B1449+2x130B1469 2x130B1389+2x130B1391 1720 1000 P1000 1675 6724 5434 <80
2x130B1260+2x130B1261 2x130B1217+2x130B1228
Table 4.7 Advanced Harmonic Filters 380-415 V, 50 Hz, E- and F-Frames
Code Code Filter Losses

Typical VLT model and current Acoustic
number number current Frame size
motor ratings AHF005 AHF010 noise
AHF005 AHF010 rating
IP00 IP00
[A] [kW] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBA] AHF005 AHF010
IP20 IP20
130B3131 130B3090 204 110 N110 204 1080 743 <75 X6 X6
130B2869 130B2500
130B3132 130B3091 251 132 N132 251 1194 864 <75 X7 X7
130B2870 130B2700
130B3133 130B3092 304 160 N160 304 1288 905 <75 X8 X7
130B2871 130B2819
130B3157 130B3155 325 1406 952 <75 X8 X7
Paralleling for 355 kW
130B3156 130B3154
130B3134 130B3093 381 200 N200 381 1510 1175 <77 X8 X7
130B2872 130B2855
130B3135 130B3094 480 250 N250 472 1850 1542 <77 X8 X8
130B2873 130B2856
2x130B3133 2x130B3092 608 315 N315 590 2576 1810 <80
2x130B2871 2x130B2819
Table 4.8 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 380-415 V, 60 Hz, D-Frame

Code Code Filter Losses

Typical VLT model and Acousti
number AHF005 number AHF010 current AHF00 Frame size
motor current ratings AHF010 c noise
IP00 IP00 rating 5
2x130B3157 2x130B3155 650 315 P355 647 2812 1904 <80
2x130B3156 2x130B3154
130B3133+130B3134 130B3092+130B3093 685 355 P400 684 2798 2080 <80
130B2871+130B2872 130B2819+130B2855
4 4
2x130B3134 2x130B3093 762 400 P450 779 3020 2350 <80
2x130B2872 2x130B2855
130B3134+130B3135 130B3093+130B3094 861 450 P500 857 3362 2717 <80
130B2872+130B3135 130B2855+130B2856
2x130B3135 2x130B3094 960 500 P560 964 3704 3084 <80
2x130B2873 2x130B2856
3x130B3134 3x130B3093 1140 560 P630 1090 4530 3525 <80
3x130B2872 3x130B2855
2x130B3134+130B3135 2x130B3093+130B3094 1240 630 P710 1227 4872 3892 <80
2x130B2872+130B2873 2x130B2855+130B2856
3x130B3135 3x130B3094 1440 710 P800 1422 5556 4626 <80
3x130B2873 3x130B2856
2x130B3134+2x130B3135 2x130B3093+2x130B3094 1722 800 P1M0 1675 6724 5434 <80
2x130B2872+2x130B2873 2x130B2855+2x130B2856
Table 4.9 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 380-415 V, 60 Hz, E- and F-Frames
Code Code Filter current Typical VLT model and current Losses Acoustic
Frame size
number number rating motor ratings AHF005 AHF010 noise
AHF005 AHF010
IP00 IP00 [A] [HP] [HP] [A] [W] [W] [dBA] AHF005 AHF010
IP20 IP20
130B1799 130B1782 183 150 N110 183 1080 743 <75 X6 X6
130B1764 130B1496
130B1900 130B1783 231 200 N132 231 1194 864 <75 X7 X7
130B1765 130B1497
130B2200 130B1784 291 250 N160 291 1288 905 <75 X8 X7
130B1766 130B1498
130B2257 130B1785 355 300 N200 348 1406 952 <75 X8 X7
130B1768 130B1499
130B3168 130B3166 380 Used for paralleling at 355 kW 1510 1175 <77 X8 X7
130B3167 130B3165
130B2259 130B1786 436 350 N250 436 1852 1542 <77 X8 X8
130B1769 130B1751
130B1900+ 130B1783+ 522 450 N315 531 2482 1769 <80
130B2200 130B1784
130B1765+ 130B1497+
130B1766 130B1498
Table 4.10 Advanced Harmonic Filters 440-480 V, 60 Hz, D-Frame

Filter Losses Acoust

Typical VLT model and
current AHF00 AHF01 ic Frame size
Code number AHF005 Code number AHF010 motor current ratings
rating 5 0 noise
IP00/IP20 IP00/IP20
AHF00 AHF01
[A] [HP] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBA]
5 0
2x130B2200 2x130B1784 582 500 P355 580 2576 1810 <80
2x130B1766 2x130B1498
130B2200+130B3166 130B1784+130B3166 671 550 P400 667 2798 2080 <80
4 4
130B1766+130B3167 130B1498+130B3165
2x130B2257 2x130B1785 710 600 P450 711 2812 1904 <80
2x130B1768 2x130B1499
2x130B3168 2x130B3166 760 650 P500 759 3020 2350 <80
2x130B3167 2x130B3165
2x130B2259 2x130B1786 872 750 P560 867 3704 3084 <80
2x130B1769 2x130B1751
3x130B2257 3x130B1785 1065 900 P630 1022 4218 2856 <80
3x130B1768 3x130B1499
3x130B3168 3x130B3166 1140 1000 P710 1129 4530 3525 <80
3x130B3167 3x130B3165
3x130B2259 3x130B1786 1308 1200 P800 1344 5556 4626 <80
3x130B1769 3x130B1751
2x130B2257+2x130B2259 2x130B17852x130B1785 1582 1350 P1M0 1490 6516 5988 <80
2x130B1768+2x130B1768 +2x130B1786
2x130B1499+2x130B1751
Table 4.11 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 440-480 V, 60 Hz, E- and F-Frames
Filter
Typical VLT model and Acoustic
Code number Code number current Losses
motor current ratings noise Frame size
AHF005 IP00/ AHF010 IP00/ rating
IP20 IP20 50 Hz AHF005 AHF010
[A] [HP] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBa] AHF005 AHF010
130B5269 130B5237
87 75 N75K 85 962 692 <72 X6 X6
130B5254 130B5220
130B5270 130B5238
109 100 N90K 106 1080 743 <72 X6 X6
130B5255 130B5221
130B5271 130B5239
128 125 N110 124 1194 864 <72 X6 X6
130B5256 130B5222
130B5272 130B5240
155 150 N132 151 1288 905 <72 X7 X7
130B5257 130B5223
130B5273 130B5241
197 200 N160 189 1406 952 <72 X7 X7
130B5258 130B5224
130B5274 130B5242
240 250 N200 234 1510 1175 <75 X8 X8
130B5259 130B5225
130B5275 130B5243
296 300 N250 286 1852 1288 <75 X8 X8
130B5260 130B5226
2x130B5273 130B5244
366 350 N315 339 2812 1542 <75 X8
2x130B5258 130B5227
2x130B5273 130B5245
395 400 N400 395 2812 1852 <75 X8
2x130B5258 130B5228
Table 4.12 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 600 V, 60 Hz

Filter
Typical VLT model and Acoustic
Code number Code number current Losses
motor Current Ratings noise Frame size
AHF005 IP00/ AHF010 IP00/ rating
IP20 IP20 50 Hz AHF005 AHF010
[A] [HP] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBa] AHF005 AHF010
2x130B5274 2x130B5242
480 500 P500 482 3020 2350
2x130B5259 2x130B5225
2x130B5275 2x130B5243
592 600 P560 549 3704 2576
4 4
2x130B5260 2x130B5226
3x130B5274 2x130B5244
732 650 P630 613 4530 3084
3x130B5259 2x130B5227
3x130B5274 2x130B5244
732 750 P710 711 4530 3084
3x130B5259 2x130B5227
3x130B5275 3x130B5243
888 950 P800 828 5556 3864
3x130B5260 3x139B5226
4x130B5274 3x130B5244
960 1050 P900 920 6040 4626
4x130B5259 3x130B5227
4x130B5275 3x130B5244
1098 1150 P1M0 1032 7408 4626
4x130B5260 3x130B5227
4x130B5244
1580 1350 P1M2 1227 6168
4x130B5227
Table 4.13 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 600 V, 60 Hz
Filter
current VLT model and current ratings Losses
Code number Code number rating Acoustic
Frame size
AHF005 IP00/ AHF010 IP00/ Typical Typical noise
IP20 IP20 50 Hz motor 500-550 V motor 551-690 V AHF005 AHF010
size size
[A] [kW] [kW] [A] [kW] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBa] AHF005 AHF010
130B5024 130B5325
77 45 N55K 71 75 N75K 76 841 488 <72 X6 X6
130B5169 130B5287
130B5025 130B5326
87 55 N75K 89 962 692 <72 X6 X6
130B5170 130B5288
130B5026 130B5327
109 75 N90K 110 90 N90K 104 1080 743 <72 X6 X6
130B5172 130B5289
130B5028 130B5328
128 90 N110 130 110 N110 126 1194 864 <72 X6 X6
130B5195 130B5290
130B5029 130B5329
155 110 N132 158 132 N132 150 1288 905 <72 X7 X7
130B5196 130B5291
130B5042 130B5330
197 132 N160 198 160 N160 186 1406 952 <72 X7 X7
130B5197 130B5292
130B5066 130B5331
240 160 N200 245 200 N200 234 1510 1175 <75 X8 X7
130B5198 130B5293
130B5076 130B5332
296 200 N250 299 250 N250 280 1852 1288 <75 X8 X8
130B5199 130B5294
2x130B5042 130B5333
366 250 N315 355 315 N315 333 2812 1542 X8
2x130B5197 130B5295
2x130B5042 130B5334 395 315 N355 381 400 2812 1852 X8
130B5042 130B5330
+130B5066 +130B5331
437 355 N400 413 500 N400 395 2916 2127
130B5197 130B5292
+130B5198 +130B5293
Table 4.14 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 500-690 V, 50 Hz

Filter
current VLT model and current ratings Losses
Code number Code number rating Acoustic
Frame size
AHF005 IP00/ AHF010 IP00/ Typical Typical noise
IP20 IP20 50 Hz motor 500-550 V motor 551-690 V AHF005 AHF010
size size
[A] [kW] [kW] [A] [kW] [kW] [A] [W] [W] [dBa] AHF005 AHF010
130B5066 130B5331
+130B5076 +130B5332
130B5198 130B5292
536 400 P450 504 560 P500 482 3362 2463
4 4
+130B5199 +130B5294
2 x130B5076 2x130B5332
592 450 P500 574 630 P560 549 3704 2576
2 x130B5199 2x130B5294
130B5076 130B5332
+2x130B5042 +130B5333
662 500 P560 642 710 P630 613 4664 2830
130B5199 130B5294
+2x130B5197 +130B5295
4x130B5042 2x130B5333
732 560 P630 743 800 P710 711 5624 3084
4x130B5197 2x130B5295
3x130B5076 3x130B5332
888 670 P710 866 900 P800 828 5556 3864
3x130B5199 3x130B5294
2x130B5076 2x130B5332
+2x130B5042 +130B5333
958 750 P800 962 1000 P900 920 6516 4118
2x130B5199 2x130B5294
+2x130B5197 +130B5295
6x130B5042 3x130B5333
1098 850 P1M0 1079 P1M0 1032 8436 4626
6x130B5197 3x130B5295
Table 4.15 Advanced Harmonic Filters, 500-690 V, 50 Hz
4.2.3 Ordering Numbers: Sine-Wave Filter Modules, 380–690 V AC
400 V, 50 Hz 460 V, 60 Hz 500 V, 50 Hz Frame Size Filter Ordering Number

[kW] [A] [HP] [A] [kW] [A] IP00 IP23
90 177 125 160 110 160 D1h/D3h 130B3182 130B3183
110 212 150 190 132 190 D1h/D3h
130B3184 130B3185
132 260 200 240 160 240 D1h/D3h, D2h/D4h, D13
160 315 250 302 200 302 D2h/D4h, D13
130B3186 130B3187
200 395 300 361 250 361 D2h/D4h, D13
250 480 350 443 315 443 D2h/D4h, D13, E1/E2, E9, F8/F9 130B3188 130B3189
315 600 450 540 355 540 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
130B3191 130B3192
355 658 500 590 400 590 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
400 745 600 678 500 678 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
130B3193 130B3194
450 800 600 730 530 730 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
450 800 600 730 530 730 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18 2X130B3186 2X130B3187
500 880 650 780 560 780 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
2X130B3188 2X130B3189
560 990 750 890 630 890 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
630 1120 900 1050 710 1050 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
2X130B3191 2X130B3192
710 1260 1000 1160 800 1160 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
710 1260 1000 1160 800 1160 F2/F4, F12/F13
3X130B3188 3X130B3189
800 1460 F2/F4, F12/F13
1200 1380 1000 1380 F2/F4, F12/F13
3X130B3191 3X130B3192
1000 1720 1350 1530 1100 1530 F2/F4, F12/F13
Table 4.16 Sine Wave Filter Modules, 380-500 V

525 V, 50 Hz 575 V, 60 Hz 690 V, 50 Hz Frame Size Filter Ordering Number

[kW] [A] [HP] [A] [kW] [A] IP00 IP23
75 113 100 108 90 108 D1h/D3h 130B4118 130B4119
90 137 125 131 110 131 D1h/D3h
130B4121 130B4124
110 162 150 155 132 155 D1h/D3h
132 201 200 192 160 192 D1h/D3h, D2h/D4h
130B4125 130B4126
160 253 250 242 200 242 D2h/D4h
200 303 300 290 250 290 D2h/D4h
130B4129 130B4151
4 4 250 360
350 344
315
355
344
380
D2h/D4h, F8/F9
D2h/D4h, F8/F9
130B4152 130B4153
315 429 400 400 400 410 D2h/D4h, F8/F9
400 410 E1/E2, F8/F9
355 470 450 450 450 450 E1/E2, F8/F9 130B4154 130B4155
400 523 500 500 500 500 E1/E2, F8/F9
450 596 600 570 560 570 E1/E2, F8/F9
130B4156 130B4157
500 630 650 630 630 630 E1/E2, F8/F9
500 659 630 630 F1/F3, F10/F11 2X130B4129 2X130B4151
650 630 F1/F3, F10/F11
2X130B4152 2X130B4153
560 763 750 730 710 730 F1/F3, F10/F11
670 889 950 850 800 850 F1/F3, F10/F11
2X130B4154 2X130B4155
750 988 1050 945 900 945 F1/F3, F10/F11
750 988 1050 945 900 945 F2/F4, F12/F13
3X130B4152 3X130B4153
850 1108 1150 1060 1000 1060 F2/F4, F12/F13
1000 1317 1350 1260 1200 1260 F2/F4, F12/F13 3X130B4154 3X130B4155
Table 4.17 Sine Wave Filter Modules 525-690 V
NOTE
When using Sine-wave filters, the switching frequency should comply with filter specifications in 14-01 Switching Frequency.
NOTE
See also Output Filter Design Guide

4.2.4 Ordering Numbers: dU/dt Filters
Typical application ratings

380-480 V [T4] 525-690 V [T7]
400 V, 460 V, 525 V, 575 V, 690 V,
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Frame Size Filter ordering number
[kW] [A] [HP] [A] [kW] [A] [HP] [A] [kW] [A] IP00 IP23
90
110
177
212
125
150
160
190
90
110
137
162
125
150
131
155 110 131
D1h/D3h
D1h/D3h 4 4
130B2847 130B2848
132 260 200 240 132 201 200 192 132 155 D1h/D3h, D2h/D4h, D13
160 315 250 302 160 253 250 242 160 192 D2h/D4h, D13
200 395 300 361 200 303 300 290 200 242 D2h/D4h, D13
D2h/D4h, D11 E1/E2, E9, 130B2849 130B3850
250 480 350 443 250 360 350 344 250 290
F8/F9
315 588 450 535 315 429 400 410 315 344 D2h/D4h, E9, F8/F9
355 658 500 590 355 470 450 450 355 380 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9 130B2851 130B2852
400 410 E1/E2, F8/F9
450 450 E1/E2, F8/F9
400 745 600 678 400 523 500 500 500 500 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
130B2853 130B2854
450 800 600 730 450 596 600 570 560 570 E1/E2, E9, F8/F9
500 630 650 630 630 630 E1/E2, F8/F9
450 800 600 730 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
2x130B28492 2x130B28502
500 880 650 780 500 659 650 630 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
6302 6302 F1/F3, F10/F11
560 990 750 890 560 763 750 730 710 730 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18 2x130B2851 2x130B2852
630 1120 900 1050 670 889 950 850 800 850 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18
710 1260 1000 1160 750 988 1050 945 F1/F3, F10/F11, F18 2x130B2851 2x130B2852
900 945 F1/F3, F10/F11 2x130B2853 2x130B2854
710 1260 1000 1160 750 988 1050 945 F2/F4, F12/F13 3x130B2849 3x130B2850
900 945 F2/F4, F12/F13
800 1460 1200 1380 850 1108 1150 1060 1000 1060 F2/F4, F12/F13 3x130B2851 3x130B2852
1000 1720 1350 1530 1000 1317 1350 1260 1200 1260 F2/F4, F12/F13
1100 1479 1550 1415 1400 1415 F2/F4, F12/F13 3x130B2853 3x130B2854
Table 4.18 dU/dt Filter Ordering Numbers
NOTE
See also Output Filter Design Guide

4.2.5 Ordering Numbers: Brake Resistors
For brake resistor selection information, refer to the Brake Resistor Design Guide
Use this table to determine the minimum resistance applicable to each frequency converter size.
380-480 V AC
Drive data
Aqua FC202 [T4] Pm (NO) [kW] Number of brake choppers 1) Rmin
4 4 N110
N132
110
132
1
1
3.6
3
N160 160 1 2.5
N200 200 1 2
N250 250 1 1.6
N315 315 1 1.2
P355 355 1 1.2
P400 400 1 1.2
P500 500 2 0.9
P560 560 2 0.9
P630 630 2 0.8
P710 710 2 0.7
P800 800 3 0.6
P1M0 1000 3 0.5
Table 4.19 Brake Chopper Data, 380-480 V
525-690 V AC
Drive data
Aqua FC202 [T7] Pm (NO) [kW] Number of brake choppers1) Rmin
N75K 75 1 13.5
N90K 90 1 8.8
N110 110 1 8.2
N132 132 1 6.6
N160 160 1 4.2
N200 200 1 4.2
N250 250 1 3.4
N315 315 1 2.3
N400 400 1 2.3
P450 450 1 2.3
P500 500 1 2.1
P560 560 1 2
P630 630 1 2
P710 710 2 1.3
P800 800 2 1.1
P900 900 2 1.1
P1M0 1000 3 1
P1M2 1200 3 0.8
P1M4 1400 3 0.7
Table 4.20 Brake Chopper Data 525-690 V

Rmin=Minimum brake resistance that can be used with this frequency converter . If the frequency converter includes multiple brake choppers, the
resistance value is the sum of all resisters in parallel
Rbr, nom=Nominal resistance required to achieve 150% braking torque.
1)Larger frequency converters include multiple inverter modules with a brake chopper in each inverter. Connect equal resistors to each brake
chopper.

D1h D2h D3h D4h E1 E2 F1/F3 F2/F4
130BC512.10
130BC511.10
130BC513.10
130BC510.10
How to Install
130BA818.10
130BA821.10
F3 F1 F4 F2
5 How to Install
IP21/54 IP21/54 IP20 IP20 IP21/54 IP00
130BB092.11
130BA959.10
5.1 Mechanical Installation
Bottom
C B
mounting
A
hole:
130BA885.10
d
130BA880.10
e
Top mounting locations: IP21/54 IP21/54
Lifting eye:
33 Enclosure F1 Enclosure F2
a a
130BC549.10
[1.3] c
c b
b
130BA879.10
130BA881.10
25 578 776 578 579
[1.0] [22.8] [22.8]
(22.8) (30.6)
11 624
130BB003.13
130BB005.13
[24.6]
[0.4]
VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

Base plate mount:
Bottom mounting 20.0 20.0
560.0
Bottom mounting
61.4
locations:
130BA651.10
BACK
h f locations: Enclosure F3 Enclosure F4

m
361.7
k
130BC579.10
2x579 578
FRONT 2X578 (22.8) (22.8)
[22.8] 776
70.4
[30.6]
g
130BC580.10
624
130BB004.13
130BB006.10
(24.6)
l
25
12
[0.5]
14
87
Table 5.1 Product Overview, 6-pulse Frequency Converters
5 5
5 5
88
Mechanical dimensions
Enclosure size [kW] D1h D2h D3h* D4h* E1 E2* F1 F2 F3 F4
380–480 V AC 110–160 200–315 110–160 200–315 315–450 315–450 500–710 800–1000 500–710 800–1000
How to Install
525–690 V AC 45-160 200–400 45–160 200–400 450–630 450–630 710–900 1000–1400 710–900 1000–1400
IP 21/54 21/54 20 20 21/54 00 21/54 21/54 21/54 21/54
NEMA Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Chassis Chassis Type 1/12 Chassis Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Type 1/12
Shipping dimensions [mm]
Width 997 1,170 997 1,170 2,197 1,705 2,324 2,324 2,324 2,324
Height 587 587 587 587 840 831 1,569 1,962 2,159 2,559
Depth 460 535 460 535 736 736 927 927 927 927
Frequency Converter dimensions [mm]
Height
A 901 1107 909 1122 2000 1547 2281 2281 2281 2281
Width
B 325 420 250 350 600 585 1400 1800 2000 2400
Depth
C 380 380 375 375 494 494 607 607 607 607
Dimensions brackets [mm/inch]
Centre hole to back edge a 56/2.2 23/0.9
Centre hole to top edge b 25/1.0 25/1.0
Hole diameter c 25/1.0 25/1.0
Not Applicable
Top of mounting slot to
d 27/1.1
bottom edge
Width of mounting slot e 13/0.5
Bottom mounting hole

f 63/2.5 75/3.0

from side edge
Bottom mounting hole Not Applicable
g 20/0.8 20/0.8
from bottom edge
Width of mounting slot h 11/0.4 11/0.4
Bottom mounting hole
k 25/1.0 40/1.6
from side edge
Bottom mounting hole Not Applicable Not Applicablehe
l 20/0.8 20/0.8
from bottom edge
Width of mounting slot m 11/0.4 11/0.4
Max weight [kg] 98 164 98 164 313 277 1017 1260 1318 1561
Contact Danfoss for more detailed information and CAD drawings for your own planning purposes.
*Chassis drives are intended for installation in external enclosures
Table 5.2 Legend to Table 5.1

How to Install VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
Frame size F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13

F9 F8 F11 F13
130BB691.10
130BB692.10
130BB690.10
F10 F12
Enclosure IP 21/54 21/54 21/54 21/54 21/54 21/54

protection NEMA Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12
High overload rated 315-450 kW 315-350 kW 500-710 kW 500-710 kW 800-1000 kW 800-1000 kW
power -160%
overload torque
(380-480 V)
450-630 kW
(380-480 V)
450-630 kW
(380-480 V)
710-900 kW
(380-480 V)
710-900 kW
(380-480 V)
1000-1400 kW
(380-480V)
1000-1400 kW
5 5
(525-690 V) (525-690 V) (525-690 V) (525-690 V) (525-690 V) (525-690 V)
Shipping Height 2324 2324 2324 2324 2324 2324
dimensions Width 970 1568 1760 2559 2160 2960
[mm] Depth 1130 1130 1130 1130 1130 1130
Drive Height 2204 2204 2204 2204 2204 2204
dimensions Width 800 1400 1600 2200 2000 2600
[mm] Depth 606 606 606 606 606 606
Max weight [kg] 447 669 893 1116 1037 1259
Table 5.3 Product Overview, 12-pulse Frequency Converters
NOTE
The F-Frames are available with or without options cabinet. The F8, F10 and F12 consist of an inverter cabinet on the right
and rectifier cabinet on the left. The F9, F11 and F13 have an additional options cabinet left of the rectifier cabinet. The F9
is an F8 with an additional options cabinet. The F11 is an F10 with an additional options cabinet. The F13 is an F12 with an
additional options cabinet.

5.1.1 Mechanical Mounting
130BC573.10
1. Drill holes in accordance with the measurements
given.
2. Provide screws suitable for the mounting surface.
Retighten all four screws. 1
The frequency converter allows side-by-side installation.

The back wall must always be solid.
Enclosure Air space [mm]

D1h/D2h/D3h/D4h/D5h/D6h/D7
5 5 h/D8h
225
E1/E2 225
F1/F2/F3/F4 225
F8/F9/F10/F11/F12/F13 225
Table 5.4 Required Free Air Space Above and Below

2
Frequency Converter
NOTE
If using a kit to direct the heatsink cooling air out the back
3
of the frequency converter, the required top clearance is
100 mm. Illustration 5.2 Pedestal Hardware Installation
5.1.2 Pedestal Installation of D-Frames

1 Attach the pedestal to the back channel using 2 M10 nuts
2 Fasten 2 M5 screws through the back pedestal flange into the
The D7h and D8h frequency converters are shipped with a
pedestal drive mounting bracket
pedestal and a wall spacer. Before securing the enclosure
3 Fasten 4 M5 screws through the front pedestal flange into the
to the wall, install the pedestal behind the mounting
front gland plate mounting holes
flange as shown in Illustration 5.1.
130BC574.10
Illustration 5.1 Wall Mounting Spacer

5.1.3 Pedestal Installation on F-Frame 1 Install each M8x60 mm bolt with lock washer and flat
Drives washer through the frame into the threaded hole in the
base. Install four bolts per cabinet
Pedestals on F-Frame frequency converters use eight bolts 2 Install each M10x30 mm bolt with captive lock washer and
instead of four. flat washer through the base plate and into the threaded
hole in the base. Install four bolts per cabinet
130BX472.10
5.1.4 Safety Requirements of Mechanical

Installation
WARNING 5 5
Pay attention to the requirements that apply to integration
and field mounting kit. To avoid serious injury or
equipment damage, observe the information in the list,
especially when installing large units.
CAUTION
The frequency converter is cooled with air circulation.
To protect the unit from overheating, ensure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed the maximum rated
temperature. If the ambient temperature is in the range of
45 °C - 55 °C, derating of the frequency converter is
relevant, see 3.5.5 Derating for Ambient Temperature.
Illustration 5.3 Pedestal Bolt Installation If derating for ambient temperature is not taken into
account, the service life of the frequency converter is
reduced.
130BX471.10
5.2 Pre-installation
5.2.1 Planning the Installation Site
NOTE
2
To avoid extra work during and after installation, it is

important to plan the installation of the frequency
converter in advance.
Select the best possible operation site by considering the

following:
• Ambient operating temperature
• Installation method
• How to cool the unit
• Position of the frequency converter
• Cable routing
• Ensure the power source supplies the correct

voltage and necessary current
Illustration 5.4 Close-up Detail
• Ensure that the motor current rating is within the
maximum current from the frequency converter
• If the frequency converter is without built-in

fuses, ensure that the external fuses are rated
correctly.

5.2.2 Receiving the Frequency Converter 5.2.4 Lifting
When receiving the frequency converter, make sure that Always lift the frequency converter in the dedicated lifting
the packaging is intact, and be aware of any potential eyes. For all E2 (IP00) enclosures, use a bar to avoid
damage to the unit during transport. If damage has bending the lifting holes of the frequency converter.
occurred, contact the shipping company immediately to
claim the damage.
130BC525.10
VLT R AQUA Drive
www.danfoss.com
T/C: FC-202N160T4E21H2XGC7XXSXXXXAXBXCXXXXDX
5 5 P/N: 134F9717
160 kW / 250 HP
S/N: 123456H123
IN: 3x380-480V 50/60Hz 304/291A

OUT: 3x0-Vin 0-590Hz 315/302A
o o
Type 1/ IP21 Tamb. 40 C/104 F
o o
Max Tamb. 55 C/131 F w/Output Current Derating
SCCR 100 kA at UL Voltage range 380-480V

ASSEMBLED IN USA
Listed 36U0 E70524 Ind. contr. Eq.

UL Voltage range 380-480 V
CAUTION:
See manual for special condition / prefuses
Voir manuel de conditions speciales / fusibles
WARNING:
Stored charge, wait 20 min.
Charge residuelle, attendez 20 min. Illustration 5.6 Recommended Lifting Method, D-Frame Size
Illustration 5.5 Nameplate Label
176FA245.10
5.2.3 Transportation and Unpacking
Before unpacking the frequency converter, position it as

close as possible to the final installation site.
Remove the box and leave the frequency converter on the
pallet as long as possible. Illustration 5.7 Recommended Lifting Method, E-Frame Size
WARNING
The lifting bar must be able to handle the weight of the
frequency converter. See Table 5.2 for the weight of the
different frame sizes. Maximum diameter for the bar is 2.5
cm (1 inch). The angle from the top of the drive to the
lifting cable should be 60° or greater.

130BB688.10
130BB753.10
5 5
Illustration 5.8 Recommended Lifting Method, Frame Sizes F1,

F2, F9 and F10
Illustration 5.10 Recommended Lifting Method, Frame Sizes F8

130BB689.10
NOTE
The plinth is provided in the same packaging as the
frequency converter but is not attached to frame sizes F1-
F4 during shipment. The plinth is required to allow airflow
to the frequency converter to provide proper cooling.
Position F-Frames on top of the plinth in the final instal-
lation location. The angle from the top of the frequency
converter to the lifting cable should be 60° or greater.
In addition to the drawings above, a spreader bar is an
acceptable way to lift the F-Frame.
Illustration 5.9 Recommended Lifting Method, Frame Sizes F3,

F4, F11, F12 and F13
5.2.5 Tools Needed
To perform the mechanical installation, the following tools

are needed:
• Drill with 10 mm or 12 mm drill
• Tape measure
• Wrench with relevant metric sockets (7–17 mm)
• Extensions to wrench
• Sheet metal punch for conduits or cable glands

in IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA 12) units.
• Lifting bar to lift the unit (rod or tube max. Ø 25

mm (1 inch), able to lift minimum 400 kg (880
lbs)).
• Crane or other lifting aid to place the frequency

converter in position.
• Use a Torx T50 tool to install the E1 in IP21 and

IP54 enclosure types.

5.2.6 General Considerations
176FA276.12
Wire access
Ensure that proper cable access is present including
necessary bending allowance. As the IP00 enclosure is
579
open to the bottom, cables must be fixed to the back (22.8)
panel of the enclosure where the frequency converter is
mounted.
748
NOTE (29.5) ≤105,0°
All cable lugs/shoes must mount within the width of the

terminal bus bar.
5 5 Space
Illustration 5.13 Front Clearance of IP21/IP54 Enclosure Type,
Frame Size E1.
Ensure proper space above and below the frequency
converter to allow airflow and cable access. In addition,
space in front of the unit must be considered to enable
130BB003.13
opening of the door of the panel.
578 776
(22.8) (30.6)
130BC519.10

Frame Size F1
130BB004.13
298
[11.7]
2X578
[22.8] 776
[30.6]

404
[15.9]
105
Frame Size F3

Frame Size D1h, D5h, and D6h.
130BB005.13
578 579
[22.8] [22.8]
130BC520.10
624
[24.6]

Frame Size F2
130BB006.10
395
[15.6]
2x579 578
(22.8) (22.8)
624
523
(24.6)
[20.6]
105
Frame Size F4

Frame Size D2h, D7h, and D8h.

130BB531.10
776
(30.6)

Frame Size F8
130BB003.13
578 776
(22.8) (30.6)
5 5
Frame Size F9
130BB574.10
776 776
(30.6) (30.6)

Frame Size F10
130BB575.10
776
(30.6)
(2x)
Frame Size F11
130BB576.10
579
776 (22.8)
(30.6)
624
(24.6)

Frame Size F12
130BB577.10
776 776 579

(30.6) (30.6) (22.8)
624
(24.6)

Frame Size F13

5.2.7 Cooling and Airflow
Cooling
Cooling can be achieved either by using the cooling ducts in the bottom and the top of the unit, by taking air in and out
the back of the unit, or by combining the cooling possibilities.
Duct cooling
A dedicated option has been developed to optimise installation of IP00/chassis frequency converters in Rittal TS8 enclosures
utilising the fan of the frequency converter for forced air cooling of the back channel. The air out the top of the enclosure
could be ducted outside a facility so the heat losses from the back channel are not dissipated within the control room,
reducing air conditioning requirements of the facility.
Back cooling
5 5 The back channel air can also be ventilated in and out the back of a Rittal TS8 enclosure. Using this method, the back
channel could take air from outside the facility and return the heat losses outside the facility, thus reducing air conditioning
requirements.
NOTE
A door fan is required on the enclosure to remove the heat losses not contained in the back channel of the frequency
converter and any additional losses generated from other components installed inside the enclosure. The total required air
flow must be calculated so that the appropriate fans can be selected. Some enclosure manufacturers offer software for
performing the calculations.
Airflow
The necessary airflow over the heat sink must be secured. The flow rate is shown in Table 5.7.
Drive size Airflow m3/h (cfm)

Enclosure
Drive Type Frame Size Door fan(s)/Top
protection
380-480 V (T5) 525-690 V (T7) fan Heatsink fan(s)
IP21/NEMA 1 or
N110 to N160 N75 to N160 D1h, D5h, D6h IP54/NEMA 12 102 (60) 420 (250)
D3h IP20/chassis
IP21/NEMA 1 or
N200 to N315 N200 to N400 D2h, D7h, D8h IP54/NEMA 12 204 (120) 840 (500)
D4h IP20/chassis
IP21/NEMA 1 or
6-Pulse
- P450 to P500 E1 IP54/NEMA 12 340 (200) 1105 (650)
E2 IP00/chassis 255 (150)
IP21/NEMA 1 or
E1 340 (200)
P355 to P450 P560 to P630 IP54/NEMA 12 1445 (850)
E2 IP00/chassis 255 (150)
IP21/NEMA 1 700 (412)
P500 to P1M0 P710 to P1M4 F1/F3, F2/F4 985 (580)
IP54/NEMA 12 525 (309)
F8/F9, F10/F11, IP21/NEMA 1 700 (412)
12-Pulse P315 to P1M0 P450 to P1M4 985 (580)
F12/F13 IP54/NEMA 12 525 (309)
Table 5.7 Heatsink and Front Channel Air Flow

* Airflow per fan. F-Frames contain multiple fans.
D-Frame Cooling fans DC voltage from the power card powers the fans. The
All frequency converters in this size range are equipped mixing fan is powered by 24 V DC from the main switch
with cooling fans to provide airflow along the heatsink. mode power supply. The heatsink fan and the door/top
Units in IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA 12) enclosures fan are powered by 48 V DC from a dedicated switch
have a fan mounted in the enclosure door to provide more mode power supply on the power card. Each fan has
airflow to the unit. IP20 enclosures have a fan mounted to tachometer feedback to the control card to confirm that
the top of the unit for more cooling. There is a small 24 V the fan is operating correctly. On/off and speed control of
DC mixing fan mounted under the input plate. This fan the fans is provided to reduce overall acoustical noise and
operates anytime the frequency converter is powered on. extend the life of the fans.

The following conditions activate fans on the D-Frame: (%)
130BB010.10
90
• Output current greater than 60% of nominal
80
• IGBT over temperature 70
• IGBT low temperature 60
Drive Derating
50
• Control card over temperature
40
• DC hold active 30
• DC brake active 20
10
• Dynamic brake circuit active
0
• During pre-magnetization of the motor 0 0 0.1 3.6 9.8 21.5 43.4 76 147.1 237.5 278.9
5 5
Pressure Change (Pa)
• AMA in progress Illustration 5.25 E-Frame Derating vs. Pressure Change (Small
In addition to these conditions, the fans are always started Fan), P250T5 and P355T7-P400T7
shortly after mains input power is applied to the frequency Frequency Converter Air Flow: 650 cfm (1,105 m3/h)
converter. Once fans are started, they run for a minimum
of one minute.
(%)
130BB011.10
The following conditions activate fans on the E- and F- 90
frames: 80
70
1. AMA 60
Drive Derating
2. DC Hold 50
40
3. Pre-Mag
30
4. DC Brake 20
5. 60% of nominal current is exceeded 10

0
6. Specific heatsink temperature exceeded (power 0 0.2 0.6 2.2 5.8 11.4 18.1 30.8 69.5 152.8 210.8
size dependent). Pressure Change (Pa)
Illustration 5.26 E-Frame Derating vs. Pressure Change (Large
7. Specific power card ambient temperature
Fan), P315T5-P400T5 and P500T7-P560T7
exceeded (power-size dependent)
Frequency Converter Air Flow: 850 cfm (1,445 m3/h)
8. Specific control card ambient temperature
exceeded
External ducts (%)
If more duct work is added externally to the Rittal cabinet 90 130BB190.10
the pressure drop in the ducting must be calculated. Use 80

the derating charts to derate the frequency converter 70
according to the pressure drop. 60
Drive Derating
50
(%)
130BB007.10
90 40
80 30
70 20
60 10
Drive Derating
50 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225
40
Pressure Change
30
Illustration 5.27 F1, F2, F3, F4 Frame Derating vs. Pressure
20
Change
10
Frequency Converter Air Flow: 580 cfm (985 m3/h)
0
0 0.5 4.9 13 27.3 45.9 66 89.3 115.7 147
Pressure Increase (Pa)
Illustration 5.24 D-Frame Derating vs. Pressure Change
Frequency Converter Air Flow: 450 cfm (765 m3/h)

5.2.8 Gland/Conduit Entry - IP21 (NEMA 1)
130BC524.10
and IP54 (NEMA12) 369
[14.5]
27 185
[1.0] [7.3]
Cables are connected through the gland plate from the 1

2
bottom. Remove the plate and plan where to place the

entry for the glands or conduits.
NOTE
The gland plate must be fitted to the frequency converter
145
[5.7]
to ensure the specified protection degree.
5 5 Cable entries viewed from the bottom of the frequency

converter - 1) Mains side 2) Motor side
130BB073.10
196
[7.7]
Illustration 5.30 D2h, Bottom View
Illustration 5.28 Example of Proper Installation of Gland Plate
130BC550.10
242
[9.5]
121
[4.8]
43
130BC521.10
27 274
[1.0] [1.7]
[10.8]
137
[5.4]
1 2
2
1
138 224
[5.4]
[8.8]
111
[4.4]
205
[8.1]
Illustration 5.31 D5h & D6h, Bottom View
Illustration 5.29 D1h, Bottom View

994.3
130BA841.12
655.9
130BC552.10
[25.825] [39.146]
337
[13.3] 37.7 460.0
[1.485] [18.110]
1
169
2
[6.6]
216.5
199.5
[8.524]
43 535.0 [7.854]
[1.7] [21.063]
281.8 258.2
[11.096] [10.167]
-A-
35.5 533.0
[1.398] [20.984]
1
36.2 594.8
[1.425] [23.417]
1727.8
[68.024]
Illustration 5.35 F2, Bottom View
5 5
222
[8.7]
1265.3 593.0
130BA843.12
(49.815) (23.346)
634.7
(24.989)
37.7
(1.485) 2X 460.0
(18.110)
115
[4.5] 2X 216.5 199.5

535.0 (8.524) (7.854)
(21.063)
2X 281.3 258.5
(11.075) (10.177)
Illustration 5.32 D7h & D8h, Bottom View 533.0
35.5 (20.984)
(1.398) 597.0
(23.504) 1
1130.0
36.2 (44.488)
(1.425) 1192.8
1 2
176FA289.11
35 (46.961)
1925.8
(75.819)

62.5
1252.8 994.3
130BA839.10
634.7 (49.321) (39.146)
(24.989)
37.7
202.8
(1.485) 2X 460.0
(18.110)
130.0
2X 216.5
(8.524) 199.5
535.0 (7.854)
(21.063)
2X 281.8 258.2
(11.096) (10.167)
98.6
533.0
35.5 (20.984)
(1.398) 597.0
36.2 (23.504)
(1.425) 1130.0 1
(44.488)
1191.8
(46.921) 2324.8
350
(91.528)

Illustration 5.33 E1, Bottom View
F1-F4: Cable entries viewed from the bottom of the 5.2.9 Gland/Conduit Entry, 12-Pulse - IP21
frequency converter - 1) Place conduits in marked areas (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA12)
668.3
130BA837.12
593.0
37.7
(26.311) (23.346)
1 NOTE
(1.485) 460.0 Cable entries viewed from the bottom of the frequency
(18.110)
converter
216.5
(8.524) 199.5
(7.854)
535.0
(21.063)
281.8 258.5
(11.096) (10.177)
533.0 35.5
36.2 (20.984) (1.398)
(1.425) 595.8
(23.457) 1328.8
(52.315)

857 . 7 994 . 3
130BB696.10
130BB533.10
70.0 593.0 1
[ 2.756 ] [ 23.326 ]
70 . 0 593 . 0 [ 33 . 768 ] [ 39 . 146 ]
1
[ 2.756 ] [ 23 . 346 ]
199.5
[ 7.854 ]
535.0
21.063 ] 199 . 5
258.5 535 . 0 [ 7 . 854 ]
[10.177 ]
[ 21 . 063 ]
258 . 5
35.5
[ 1 ] 36.5 733.0 [ 10 . 177 ]
[ 1.437 ] [ 28.858 ]
36 . 5
Illustration 5.38 Frame Size F8 37 . 2 [ 1 . 437 ] 733 . 0
[ 1 . 466 ] [ 28 . 858 ] 800 . 0
[ 32 ] 1933 . 0
[ 76 ]
673,0 593,0
Illustration 5.42 Frame Size F12
130BB698.10
[ 26.50 ] [ 23.35 ]
460,0 1
37,2 [ 18.11 ]
5 5
[ 1.47 ]
1657 . 7 994 . 3
130BB697.10
[ 65 . 2641 ] [ 39 . 146 ] 1
870 . 7 593 . 0
70 . 0 593 . 0 [ 34 . 252 ] [ 23 . 346 ]
199,5 [ 2.756 ] [ 23 . 346 ]
535,0 [ 7.85 ]
[ 21 . 06 ] 199 . 5
535 . 0 [ 7 . 854 ]
258,5 [ 21 . 0631 ]
258 . 5
[ 10.18 ]
[ 10 . 177 ]
37 . 2
[ 1 . 466 ]
36 . 5 733 . 0
37.2 [ 1 . 437 ] [ 28 . 858 ] 800 . 0
533,0 [ 31. 496 ] 1533 . 0
[1.47] [ 20.98 ] [ 60 . 354 ] 1600 . 0
603,0
[ 62 . 992 ] 2733 . 0
36.5 [ 23.74 ] 1336,0 [ 107 . 598 ]
[1.44] [ 52.60 ]
70 . 0 593 . 0
1 Place conduits in marked areas
130BB694.10
1
[ 2.756 ] [ 23 . 346 ]
Table 5.8 Legend to Illustration 5.38-Illustration 5.43

199 . 5
535 . 0 [ 7 . 854 ]
[ 21 . 063 ]
258 . 5
5.3 Electrical Installation
[ 10 . 177 ]
36 . 5 5.3.1 Cables General

37 . 2 [ 1 . 437 ] 733 . 0
[ 1 . 466 ] [ 28 . 858 ] 800 . 0
[ 31. 496 ] 1533 . 0
[ 60 . 354 ] NOTE
Illustration 5.40 Frame Size F10 Always comply with national and local regulations on
cable cross-sections.
1670 . 0 593 . 0
For more information on the correct torques, see
130BB695.10
[ 65 . 748 ] [ 23 . 346 ]
870 . 7 1
70 . 0
[ 2.756 ]
593 . 0 [ 34 . 252 ]
593 . 0
[ 23 . 346 ] Table 5.12.
[ 23 . 346 ]
5.3.2 Preparing Gland Plates for Cables

199 . 5
535 . 0 [ 7 . 854 ]
[ 21 . 0631 ]
258 . 5
[ 10 . 177 ]
37 . 2
[ 1 . 466 ]
733 . 0
1. Remove gland plate from the frequency
36 . 5
[ 1 . 437 ] [ 28 . 858 ] 800 . 0
[ 31. 496 ] 1533 . 0 converter. (Avoiding foreign parts falling into the
[ 60 . 354 ]
frequency converter when removing knockouts).
1600 . 0
[ 62 . 992 ] 2333 . 0
[ 91 . 850 ]
Illustration 5.41 Frame Size F11 2. Provide support for the gland plate around the
hole being punched or drilled.
3. Remove debris from the hole.
4. Mount the cable entry on the frequency
converter.

5.3.3 Connection to Mains and Earthing 5.3.4 Motor Cable Connection
NOTE
NOTE Screened motor cable is recommended. If an unscreened
The plug connector for power can be removed. cable is used, some EMC requirements are not complied
with. For more information, see 5.10 EMC-correct Instal-
1. Make sure that the frequency converter is lation.
properly earthed. Connect to earth connection
(terminal 95). Use screw from the accessory bag. 1. Fasten de-coupling plate to the bottom of the
2. Place plug connector 91, 92, 93 from the frequency converter with screws and washers
accessory bag onto the terminals labelled MAINS from the accessory bag.
at the bottom of the frequency converter. 2. Attach motor cable to terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98
(W).
5 5
3. Connect mains wires to the mains plug
connector. 3. Connect to earth connection (terminal 99) on de-
coupling plate with screws from the accessory
CAUTION 4.
bag.
Insert terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W) and motor
The earth connection cable cross section must be at least
cable to terminals labelled MOTOR.
10 mm2 or 2 rated mains wires terminated separately
according to EN 50178. 5. Fasten screened cable to de-coupling plate with
screws and washers from the accessory bag.
The mains connection is fitted to the main switch if All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can
included. be connected to the frequency converter. Normally, small
motors are star-connected (230/400 V, D/Y). Large motors
NOTE are delta-connected (400/690 V, D/Y). Refer to the motor
Check that mains voltage corresponds to the mains name plate for correct connection mode and voltage.
voltage of the frequency converter name plate.
U V W
175ZA114.10
CAUTION
IT Mains U V W
Do not connect 400 V frequency converters with RFI-filters

to mains supplies with a voltage between phase and earth
of more than 440 V.
For IT mains and delta earth (grounded leg), mains voltage
can exceed 440 V between phase and earth. 96 97 98 96 97 98
130BA026.10
Illustration 5.45 Motor Cable Connection

3 Phase
91 (L1)
power
input
92 (L2)
NOTE
93 (L3)
If motors are not inverter-duty rated, fit a Sine-wave filter
95 PE
on the output of the frequency converter.
Illustration 5.44 Terminals for Mains and Earthing

Term. 96 97 98 99 Output junction box requirements:

no. The length, minimum 2.5 meters, and quantity of cables
U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0–100% of mains must be equal from each inverter module to the common
voltage. terminal in the junction box.
3 wires out of motor
NOTE
U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected
PE1) If a retrofit application requires unequal numbers of wires
W2 U2 V2 6 wires out of motor
per phase, consult the factory for requirements and
U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
documentation or use the top/bottom entry side cabinet
U2, V2, and W2 to be interconnected
busbar option.
separately.
Table 5.9 Motor Cable Connection 5.3.6 Electrical Installation of Motor Cables
5 5 1)Protected Earth Connection
Screening of cables
5.3.5 Motor Cables Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They
spoil the screening effect at higher frequencies.
See 3.1 General Specifications for maximum dimensioning If it is necessary to break the screen to install a motor
of motor cable cross-section and length. isolator or motor contactor, the screen must be continued
at the lowest possible HF impedance.
• To comply with EMC emission specifications, use
Cable length and cross-section
a screened/armoured motor cable.
The frequency converter has been tested with a given
• Keep the motor cable as short as possible to length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. If
reduce the noise level and leakage currents. the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance - and
thus the leakage current - increase, and the cable length
• Connect the motor cable screen to both the de-
coupling plate of the frequency converter and to must be reduced correspondingly.
the metal cabinet of the motor. Switching frequency
When frequency converters are used together with Sine-
• Make the screen connections with the largest
possible surface area (cable clamp), by using the wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the
supplied installation devices in the frequency switching frequency must be set according to the Sine-
converter. wave filter instruction in 14-01 Switching Frequency.
Aluminum conductors
• Avoid mounting with twisted screen ends
(pigtails), which spoils high frequency screening Aluminum conductors are not recommended. Terminals
effects. can accept aluminum conductors but the conductor
surface has to be clean, free of oxidation and sealed with
• If it is necessary to split the screen to install a neutral acid free Vaseline grease before the conductor is
motor isolator or motor relay, the screen must be connected.
continued with the lowest possible HF Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after
impedance. two days due to the softness of the aluminum. It is crucial
F-frame requirements to keep the connection a gas tight joint, otherwise the
F1/F3 requirements: aluminum surface oxidizes again.
Motor phase cable quantities must be multiples of 2,
resulting in 2, 4, 6, or 8 (one cable is not allowed) to
obtain equal numbers of wires attached to both inverter
module terminals. The cables are required to be equal
length within 10% between the inverter module terminals
and the first common point of a phase. The recommended
common point is the motor terminals.
F2/F4 requirements:
Motor phase cable quantities must be multiples of 3,
resulting in 3, 6, 9, or 12 (1 or 2 cables are not allowed) to
obtain equal numbers of wires attached to each inverter
module terminal. The wires are required to be equal length
within 10% between the inverter module terminals and the
first common point of a phase. The recommended
common point is the motor terminals.

5.3.7 Fuses
NOTE
All fuses mentioned are maximum fuse sizes.
Branch circuit protection:

To protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard, all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear or machine,
must be short-circuit and overcurrent protected according to the national/international regulations.
Short circuit protection:
The frequency converter must be protected against short-circuit to avoid electrical or fire hazard. Danfoss recommends
using the fuses mentioned in Table 5.10 and Table 5.11 to protect service personnel or other equipment in case of an
internal failure in the unit. The frequency converter provides full short circuit protection in a short-circuit on the motor
output.
5 5
Over-current protection:
To avoid fire hazard doe to overheating of the cables in the installation, provide overload protection. Over current
protection must always be carried out according to national regulations. The frequency converter is equipped with an
internal over current protection that can be used for upstream overload protection (UL-applications excluded). See
4-18 Current Limit. Fuses must be designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 Arms
(symmetrical), 500 V/600 V maximum.
5.3.8 Fuse Specifications
Enclosure Power Recommended Recommended

size [kW] fuse size Max. fuse
N110T4 aR-315 aR-315
N132T4 aR-350 aR-350
N165 aR-400 aR-400
D
N200T4 aR-550 aR-550
N250T4 aR-630 aR-630
N315T4 aR-800 aR-700
E P355-P450 aR-900 aR-900
P500-P560 aR-1600 aR-1600
F P630-P710 aR-2000 aR-2000
P800-P1M0 aR-2500 aR-2500
Table 5.10 380-480 V, Fuse Recommendations, Frame Sizes D, E and F

Enclosure Power Recommended Recommended

size [kW] fuse size Max. fuse
aR-160 aR-160
N75K
D
N90K-N160 aR-160 aR-160
N200-N400 aR-550 aR-550
P450-P500T7 aR-700 aR-700
E
P560-P630T7 aR-900 (500-560) aR-900 (500-560)
aR-1600 aR-1600
P710-P1M0T7
5 5 aR-2000 aR-2000
F P1M2T7
aR-2500 aR-2500
P1M4T7
Table 5.11 525-690 V, Fuse Recommendations, Frame Sizes D, E and F

5.3.9 Access to Control Terminals Wiring to Control Terminals
130BA150.10
All terminals to the control cables are located underneath
the terminal cover on the front of the frequency converter.
Remove the terminal cover with a screw driver. 9 - 10 mm
(0.37 in)
Illustration 5.47
5.3.10 Control Terminals
130BT311.10
Drawing reference numbers:
1. 10 pole plug digital I/O
2. 3 pole plug RS-485 Bus 5 5
3. 6 pole analog I/O
4. USB Connection
130BA012.11
Illustration 5.48
130BT312.10
3
55
54
53
50
42
39
37
69 20
68
61 33
4 32
29
27
19
2 18
13
12
Illustration 5.49
1
130BT306.10
Illustration 5.46 Control Terminals (all Frame Sizes)
5.3.11 Control Cable Terminals
To mount the cable to the terminal:

1. Strip isolation of 9-10 mm
2. Insert a screw driver1) in the rectangular hole.
3. Insert the cable in the adjacent circular hole.
Illustration 5.50 Control Cable Terminals
4. Remove the screw driver. The cable is now
mounted to the terminal.
To remove the cable from the terminal:
1. Insert a screw driver1) in the square hole.
2. Pull out the cable.
1) Max. 0.4 x 2.5 mm

5.3.12 Basic Wiring Example
1. Mount terminals from the accessory bag to the

front of the frequency converter.
2. Connect terminals 18 and 27 to +24 V (terminal
12/13)
Default settings:
18 = Start
27 = stop inverse
130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
5 5
P 5 - 10[9]
+24V
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Start Stop inverse Safe Stop
Speed
Start (18)
Start (27)
Illustration 5.51 Terminal 37 available with Safe Stop Function

only!

5.3.13 Control Cable Length
Digital in/digital out

Dependent on what electronics are being used, it is possible to calculate the maximum cable impedance based on the 4 kΩ
frequency converter input impedance.
Analog in/analog out

Again the electronics used puts a limitation on the cable length.
5.3.14 Electrical Installation, Control Cables
5 5
130BC548.11
TB5
230 VAC R1 Anti-condensation heater (optional)
50/60Hz
230 VAC TB6 Contactor (optional)

50/60Hz
= = =
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
Load Share 88 (-) Switch Mode
Power Supply Regen +
89 (+)
10Vdc 24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 200mA resistor Regen
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + - (R-) 81
+10Vdc
A53 U-I (S201)
Regen - 83
53 (A IN)
1 2
0 VDC - 10VDC
ON
ON=0-20mA Relay1
0/4-20 mA A54 U-I (S202) 03
OFF=0-10V 240Vac, 2A
1 2
54 (A IN)
ON
0 VDC - 10VDC 02
0/4-20 mA 400Vac, 2A
55 (COM A IN) 01
Relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
S801/Bus Term.
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) OFF-ON
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open 1
Brake Temp
0V 5V 2 (NC)
24V (NPN)
24V
0V
S801
0V RS-485 (P RS-485) 68 RS-485
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
(NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN) - option
Illustration 5.52 Interconnect Diagram for D frames

130BA544.12
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch Mode
DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 200mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + - (R-) 81
+10Vdc
S201
1 2
53 (A IN)
ON
0-10Vdc
ON=0-20mA relay1
5 5
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0-10V
1 2
ON
54 (A IN) 240Vac, 2A
0-10Vdc 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
24V (NPN)
24V
0V
S801
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
* (NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN)
Illustration 5.53 Interconnect Diagram E-frames and F-frame (6-pulse)
*Safe Stop input available with Safe Stop Function only NOTE
Control cables must be screened.
Very long control cables and analog signals, in rare cases,
and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz earth Use a clamp from the accessory bag to connect the screen
loops due to noise from mains supply cables. to the frequency converter de-coupling plate for control
cables.
In this case, Break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor
between screen and chassis. See 5.10.3 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables for
the correct termination of control cables.
The digital and analog in- and outputs must be connected
separately to th common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) to
avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other
groups. For example, switching on the digital input
disturbs the analog input signal.

130BT340.10
5 5
Illustration 5.54 Screened Control Cable

5.3.15 12-Pulse Control Cables
CONTROL CARD CONNCECTION
130BB759.10
Switch Mode
Power Supply
10Vdc 24Vdc
15mA 130/200mA
+10 Vdc 50 (+10 V OUT)
S202
-10 Vdc
1 2
53 (A IN) ON
+10 Vdc
5 5 0/4-20 mA S201
ON/I=0-20mA
OFF/U=0-10V
1 2
-10 Vdc
ON
54 (A IN )
+10 Vdc
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN )
12 (+24V OUT )
P 5-00
13 (+24V OUT )
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 0V (PNP)
24V (NPN) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output

19 (D IN ) 0V (PNP) 0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT ) 0V (PNP) S801
ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
24 V OFF=Open
OV
5V
24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT )
24 V 0V (PNP)
S801
OV
RS - 485 (N RS-485) 69 RS-485
Interface
24V (NPN)
32 (D IN ) 0V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61

33 (D IN )
0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
(NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN )
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CI45 CI45 CI45 CI45 CI45
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18
Illustration 5.55 Control Cable Diagram

130BB760.10
CUSTOMER 118 117
1
SUPPLIED 24V RET. + - 1
1 CONTROL CARD PIN 20
REGEN
(TERMINAL JUMPERED TOGETHER)
TERMINALS 2
1
CUSTOMER INVERTER
2 3
SUPPLIED 24V CABINET
3 CUSTOMER
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 4 CONNECTION
3 (TERMINAL JUMPERED TOGETHER) DETAILS
5
3
10 MCB 113 PIN X46/1 5
11 MCB 113 PIN X46/3 TB8 4

12 MCB 113 PIN X46/5 3
C14
5 5
13 MCB 113 PIN X46/7
W 98 98 W
14 MCB 113 PIN X46/9 C13
PILZ
15 MCB 113 PIN X46/11 TERMINALS V 97 97 V
A2
16 MCB 113 PIN X46/13 U 96 96 U
FUSE
17 MCB 113 PIN 12
TB4 R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE 81 R-
2
R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE 82 R+
30 TB08 PIN 01
W 98
31 TB08 PIN 02
V 97
32 TB08 PIN 04
33 TB08 PIN 05 U 96
NAMUR Terminal Definition
34 MCB 113 PIN X47/1 TB3 INVERTER 1
35 MCB 113 PIN X47/3

R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE
36 MCB 113 PIN X47/2
R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE
37 MCB 113 PIN X47/4 1
39 MCB 113 PIN X47/5 W 98
40 MCB 113 PIN X47/7 V 97
41 MCB 113 PIN X47/9 96

U
R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE
2
60 MCB 113 PIN X45/1 R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE
61 MCB 113 PIN X45/2

TB3 INVERTER 2
62 MCB 113 PIN X45/3
63 MCB 113 PIN X45/4 AUX FAN AUX FAN

90 MCB 112 PIN 1
91 MCB 112 PIN 2 L1 L2 L1 L2

100 101 102 103
TB7
Illustration 5.56 Diagram Showing all Electrical Terminals without Options

Terminal 37 is the input to be used for Safe Stop. For instructions on Safe Stop installation, refer to 5.7 Safe Stop Installation.
1) F8/F9 = (1) set of terminals.
2) F10/F11 = (2) sets of terminals.
3) F12/F13 = (3) sets of terminals.

Long control cables and analog signals, in rare cases, and NOTE
depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz earth loops Control cables must be screened/armoured.
due to noise from mains supply cables.
Connect the wires as described in the Operating
In such cases, break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor Instruction for the frequency converter. Remember to
between screen and chassis if needed. connect the shields in a proper way to ensure optimum
electrical immunity.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be
connected separately to the frequency converter common 5.3.16 Switches S201, S202 and S801
inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) to avoid earth currents from
both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching
Switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) are used to select a
5 5
on the digital input disturbs the analog input signal.
current (0–20 mA) or a voltage (0–10 V) configuration of
the analog input terminals 53 and 54 respectively.
Input polarity of control terminals
Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination
PNP (Source)
130BT106.10
on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69).
+24 VDC
Digital input wiring

0 VDC
See Illustration 5.52 and Illustration 5.53.

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Default setting:
S201 (A53) = OFF (voltage input)
S202 (A54) = OFF (voltage input)
S801 (Bus termination) = OFF
NOTE
Change switch position at power off only.
130BT310.10
Illustration 5.57 Input Polarity of Control Terminals
+24 VDC
130BT107.11
0 VDC
NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
1
N O
2
BUS TER.
OFF-ON A53 A54
U- I U- I
VLT
Illustration 5.59 Switch Locations

Illustration 5.58 Input Polarity of Control Terminals

5.4 Connections - Frame Sizes D, E and F

5.4.1 Torque
When tightening electrical connections, it is important to tighten with the correct torque. Torque that is too low or too high
results in a bad electrical connection. Use a torque wrench for correct torque.
NOTE
Always use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts.
Frame size Terminal Size Torque nominal [Nm (in-lbs)] Torque range [Nm (in-lbs)]
D1h/D3h Mains
Motor
M10 29.5 (261) 19-40 (168-354)
5 5
Load sharing
Regeneration
Earth (ground) M8 14.5 (128) 8.5-20.5 (75-181)
Brake
D2h/D4h Mains M10 29.5 (261) 19-40 (168-354)
Motor
Regeneration
Load Sharing
Earth (ground)
Brake M8 8.5-20.5 (75-181)
E Mains M10 19.1 (169) 17.7-20.5 (156-182)
Motor
Load Sharing
Earth
Regen M8 9.5 (85) 8.8-10.3 (78.2-90.8 in-lbs.)
Brake
F Mains M10 19.1 (169) 17.7-20.5 (156-182 in-lbs.)
Motor
Load Sharing
Regen: DC- M8 9.5 (85) 8.8-10.3 (78.2-90.8)
DC+ M10 19.1 (169) 17.7-20.5 (156-182)
F8-F9 Regen M10 19.1 (169) 17.7-20.5 (156-182.)
Earth M8 9.5 (85) 8.8-10.3 (78.2-90.8)
Brake
Table 5.12 Terminal Tightening Torques

5.4.2 Power Connections Connect the motor cable screen to both the de-coupling
plate of the frequency converter and to the metal housing
Cabling and fusing of the motor.
NOTE Make the screen connections with the largest possible
Cables general surface area (cable clamp) by using the supplied instal-
All cabling must comply with national and local lation devices within the frequency converter.
regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient Cable-length and cross-section
temperature. UL applications require 75 °C copper The frequency converter has been EMC tested with a given
conductors. 75 and 90 °C copper conductors are thermally length of cable. Keep the motor cable as short as possible
acceptable for the frequency converter to use in non-UL to reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
applications.
Switching frequency
5 5 The power cable connections are situated as shown in
When frequency converters are used together with Sine-
wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the
Illustration 5.60. Dimensioning of cable cross section must
switching frequency must be set according to the
be done in accordance with the current ratings and local
instructions in 14-01 Switching Frequency.
legislation. See 3.1 General Specifications for details.
Term. 96 97 98 99
For protection of the frequency converter, the no.
recommended fuses must be used or the unit must be U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0-100% of mains
with built-in fuses. Recommended fuses are listed in the voltage.
Operating Instructions. Always ensure that proper fusing is 3 wires out of motor
made according to local regulation. U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected
PE1)
The mains connection is fitted to the mains switch if U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
included. U2, V2, and W2 to be interconnected
separately.
130BA026.10
Table 5.13 Motor Cable Connection

3 Phase 1)Protected Earth Connection
91 (L1)
power
input
92 (L2) NOTE
93 (L3) In motors without phase insulation paper or other
95 PE insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with
voltage supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a Sine-
Illustration 5.60 Power Cable Connections
U V W
175ZA114.10
NOTE
The motor cable must be screened/armoured. If an U V W
unscreened/unarmoured cable is used, some EMC
requirements are not complied with. Use a screened/
armoured motor cable to comply with EMC emission
specifications. For more information, see 5.10 EMC-correct
Installation.
96 97 98 96 97 98
See 3.1 General Specifications for correct dimensioning of

motor cable cross-section and length. Illustration 5.61 Motor Cable Connection
Screening of cables
Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They
spoil the screening effect at higher frequencies. If it is
necessary to break the screen to install a motor isolator or
motor contactor, the screen must be continued at the
lowest possible HF impedance.

10
10
130BC252.11
11
11
130BC301.11
1
16
5 5
6
7
15 14
4
2
5
12
3
13
(IP 21/54
8
NEMA 1/12)
13 (IP 20/Chassis) 9
Illustration 5.62 D-Frame Interior Components
Illustration 5.63 Close-up View: LCP and Control Functions
1 LCP (Local Control Panel) 9 Relay 2 (04, 05, 06)

2 RS-485 serial bus connector 10 Lifting ring
3 Digital I/O and 24 V power supply 11 Mounting slot
4 analog I/O connector 12 Cable clamp (PE)
5 USB connector 13 Earth (ground)
6 Serial bus terminal switch 14 Motor output terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W)
7 analog switches (A53), (A54) 15 Mains input terminals 91 (L1), 92 (L2), 93 (L3)
8 Relay 1 (01, 02, 03)
Table 5.14 Legend to Illustration 5.62 and Illustration 5.63.

130BC523.10
130BC522.10
3
5 5 B
1
Illustration 5.65 1) Position of Earth Terminals IP21 (NEMA type
Illustration 5.64 1) Position of Earth Terminals IP20 (chassis), D- 1) and IP54 (NEMA type 12), D-Frame Sizes
Frame Sizes
130BC535.10
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
MAINS TERMINALS MOTOR TERMINALS
A B BRAKE/REGEN TERMINALS
MAINS TERMINAL
BRAKE TERMINAL
221 227
[ 8.7 ] [ 9]
196
GROUND 148 [ 7.7 ]
[ 5.8 ]
GROUND 2X 118 90
[ 4.6 ] MOTOR
[ 3.6 ] TERMINAL
3X M10X20 STUD
WITH NUT 0
[ 0] B
[ 5.8 ]
[ 1.8 ]
146
[ 7.2 ]
[ 8.7 ]
182
46
[ 0]
[ 10.2 ]
221
[ 8.1 ]
[ 4.4 ]
[ 0]
0
A
206
113
260
U V
[ 3.9]
W
[ 1.8 ]
99
[ 7.6 ]
193
45
[ 9.8 ]
S
153
249
[ 6]
R
T
Illustration 5.66 Terminal Locations, D5h with Disconnect Option

130BC536.10
V
S
[ 8.8 ]
224
W
101
[4 ]
[ 6.4 ]
163
[ 10.4]
[ 1.3 ]
263
33
[ 0]
U
[ 11.5]
0
SECTION B-B
293
T
[ 7.5 ] [ 7.3 ]
MOTOR TERMINALS
185
SECTION A-A R
[ 10.1]
MAINS TERMINAL BRAKE/REGEN TERMINALS
[ 5.5 ]
BRAKE TERMINAL
256
140
[ 2.4 ]
62
191
MAINS TERMINAL
727
[ 28.6]
623
[ 24.5]
517
[ 20.4]
GROUND 3X 511
5 5
[ 20.1] MOTOR
TERMINAL
3X M10X20 STUD
WITH NUT
0
[ 0]
[ 10.8 ]
[0 ]
[ 11.5 ]
274
0
[ 9.7 ]
246
[ 0]
293
0
Illustration 5.67 Terminal Locations, D5h with Brake Option
130BC537.11
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
MOTOR TERMINALS
MAINS TERMINALS
BRAKE/REGEN TERMINALS
A B
MAINS
TERMINAL
458 TB6 Terminal block for contactor

[18.0 ]
BRAKE TERMINAL
3X M10X20 STUD 227

WITH NUT [8.9]
195
GROUND 153 [7.7]
[6.0 ]
GROUND 3X123 96
[4.8 ] [3.8] MOTOR
TERMINAL
0
[0.0] A B
[2.0]
[0.0]
[9.8]
[5.8]
[8.1]
[4.4]
[0.0]
50
221 [7.6 ] 249

146
206
113
[0.0]
[11.2 ]
R
286
0
[7.2] 193
[10.2]
[8.7]
[3.9]
[1.8]
[5.8]
260
182
147
99
46
S T U V W
Illustration 5.68 Terminal Locations, D6h with Contactor Option

130BC538.11
SECTION A-A A
MAINS TERMINALS
TB6 Terminal block

for contactor
5 5 MAINS TERMINAL
225
[ 8.9 ]
0
[ 0.0 ] [ 1.8 ] A
[ 3.9 ]
[ 6.0 ]
[ 0.0 ]
[ 11.2 ]
153
[ 0.0 ]
45
99
286
0
T
0
R S
Illustration 5.69 Terminal Locations, D6h with Contactor and Disconnect Options

130BC541.10
SECTION A-A
MAINS TERMINALS
MAINS TERMINAL
467
[ 18.4 ]
5 5
0
[ 0.0 ] [ 0.0 ] A
[ 2.1 ]
[ 3.9 ]
[ 5.7 ]
145
[ 0.0 ]
[ 6.4 ]
52
99
0
163
T
0
R S
Illustration 5.70 Terminal Locations, D6h with Circuit Breaker Option

130BC542.10
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
MAINS TERMINALS MOTOR TERMINALS
BRAKE/REGEN TEMINALS
A B MOTOR TERMINAL
MAINS TERMINAL
545
[ 21.4 ]
515
[ 20.3 ]
GROUND 412
[ 16.2 ] 395
5 5 BRAKE
TERMINAL
GROUND 3X 372
[14.7 ]
[ 15.6]
4X M10X20 STUD
WITH NUT
0
[ 0] A B
[ 1.9 ]
[ 3.7 ]
[ 9.4 ]
]
238
5.9
[ 5.1] 151
[ 0] 49
95
[ 14.5 ]
[ 11.5]
[ 0]
[ 4.7 ]
[ 10.9]
[ 13.6 ] 368 U
292
119
0
276
131
[ 2.6 ]
V
[ 7.8 ]
[ 8] 198
66
S
346
R
195.5
Illustration 5.71 Terminal Locations, D7h with Disconnect Option

130BC543.10
T SECTION B-B
R V MOTOR TERMINALS
[ 7.1]
181
W BRAKE/REGEN TERMINALS
[ 2.6 ]
[ 11.7 ]
B
297
SECTION A-A
375 [ 13.8 ]
66
MAINS TERMINALS MAINS TERMINAL U
[ 12.8 ] 351
[ 12.1]
[ 10.1]
309
257
269 [ 9.6 ]
[ 0]
40 [ 0 ]
S
[ 14.8 ]
243
0
0
[ 1.6 ]
BRAKE TERMINAL
325
[ 4.9 ]
[ 10.6 ]
123
A
1260
[ 49.6 ]
1202
[ 47.3 ]
1082
[ 42.6 ]
GROUND 2X 1034 MOTOR TERMINAL
5 5
[ 40.7 ]
GROUND 2X 1009 4X M10X20 STUD
[ 39.7 ] WITH NUT
0
[ 0] A
B
[ 11.4 ]
[ 0]
0
290
Illustration 5.72 Terminal Locations, D7h with Brake Option

130BC544.11
A B
SECTION A-A
MAINS TERMINALs
BRAKE/REGEN TERMINALS MAINS TERMINAL
SECTION B-B
TB6 Terminal block MOTOR TERMINALS
898 for contactor
[ 35.3 ]
BRAKE TERMINAL MOTOR TERMINAL
5 5 4X M10X20 STUD
WITH NUT
521
[ 20.5 ]
GROUND 418
[ 16.5 ] 401
[ 15.8 ]
GROUND 3X 378
[ 14.9 ]
0
[ 0] B
A
[ 14.9 ]
[ 11.5 ]
238 [ 7.8 ]
[ 1.9 ]
[0 ]
127
198
[ 0]
[ 4.7 ]
[ 9.9 ]
[5 ]
[ 5.9]
[ 13.6 ] 378
292
119
252
151
0
0
[ 3.7 ]
49
95
V
[ 9.4 ]
[ 0]
0
177
[ 7]
346
[ 2.7 ]
T U
[ 4.9 ]
69
W
123
R
S
Illustration 5.73 Terminal Locations, D8h with Contactor Option

130BC545.11
C
SECTION C-C
MAINS TERMINALS
TB6 Terminal block

for contactor
MAINS TERMINAL
5 5
567
[ 22.3 ]
0
[ 0] C
[ 4.9 ]
[ 0]
123
0
[ 0]
[ 9.7 ]
0
246
S
[ 7.4 ]
[ 2.3 ]
188
58
T
R
Illustration 5.74 Terminal Locations, D8h with Contactor and Disconnect Options

130BC546.10
SECTION D-D
MAINS TERMINALS
MAINS TERMINAL
5 5
605
[ 23.8 ]
0
[ 0]
154.5
[ 0]
[ 8]
202
[ 0]
[ 6]
0
S
224.5
[ 9]
84.5
[ 3]
R T
Illustration 5.75 Terminal Locations, D8h with Circuit Breaker Option

Terminal Locations - E1
Take the following position of the terminals into consideration when designing the cable access.
176FA278.10
492[19.4]
5 5
323[12.7]
0[0.0]
195[7.7]
600[23.6]
525[20.7]
412[16.2]
300[11.8]
188[7.4]
75[3.0]
0[0.0]
409[16.1]
371[14.6]
280[11.0]
193[7.6]
155[6.1]
0[0.0]
Illustration 5.76 IP21 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Enclosure Power Connection Positions

176FA272.10
-R 81
A A A A 19 Nm [14 FTa
453[17.8]
9
5 5
0[0.0]
0[0.0]
55[2.2]
91[3.6]
139[5.5]
175[6.9]
Illustration 5.77 IP21 (NEMA type 1) and IP54 (NEMA type 12)
Enclosure Power Connection Positions (detail B)

176FA279.10
FASTENER TORQUE: M8 9.6 Nm [7 FT-LB] FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm [14 FT-LB]
R/L1 91 S/L2 92 T/L3 93
F
19 Nm [14FT-LB]
/T1 96 V/T2 97 V/T3 9
5 5
0[0.0]
144[5.7]
26[1.0]
26[1.0]
D
0[0.0]
0[0.0]
391[15.4]
Illustration 5.78 IP21 (NEMA type 1) and IP54 (NEMA type 12) Enclosure Power Connection Position of Disconnect Switch
Frame size Unit type Dimension for disconnect terminal

IP54/IP21 UL and NEMA1/NEMA12
250/315 kW (400 V) and
E1 381 (15.0) 253 (9.9) 253 (9.9) 431 (17.0) 562 (22.1) N/A
355/450-500/630 KW (690 V)
315/355-400/450 kW (400 V) 371 (14.6) 371 (14.6) 341 (13.4) 431 (17.0) 431 (17.0) 455 (17.9)

Terminal locations - Frame size E2

Consider the following position of the terminals when designing the cable access.
176FA280.10
5 5
A
FASTENER TORQUE M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB)
R/L1 91 S/L2 92 T/L3 93
186[7.3]
9 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98
17[0.7]
0[0.0]
585[23.0]
518[20.4]
405[15.9]
293[11.5]
181[7.1]
68[2.7]
0[0.0]
409[16.1]
371[14.6]
280[11.0]
192[7.6]
154[6.1]
0[0.0]
Illustration 5.79 IP00 Enclosure Power Connection Positions
A
176FA282.10
R 81
A A A A
019Nm (14 F)
147(5.8)
9
0(0.0)
0(0.0)
47(1.9)
83(3.3)
131(5.2)
167(6.6)
Illustration 5.80 IP00 Enclosure Power Connection Positions

176FA281.10
5 5
F
E
0[0.0]
D C B 0[0.0] A 0[0.0]
Illustration 5.81 IP00 Enclosure Power Connections, Position of Disconnect Switch
NOTE
The power cables are heavy and difficult to bend. Consider the optimum position of the frequency converter for ensuring
easy installation of the cables.
Each terminal allows use of up to 4 cables with cable lugs or use of standard box lug. Earth is connected to a relevant
termination point in the frequency converter.
176FA271.10
B B
104[4.1]
A
35[1.4]
B B
10[0.4] A
0[0.0]
78[3.1]
40[1.6]
26[1.0]
26[1.0]
0[0.0]
0[0.0]
Illustration 5.82 Terminal in Detail

NOTE
Power connections can be made to positions A or B
Frame size Unit type Dimension for disconnect terminal

IP00/CHASSIS A B C D E F
250/315kW (400 V) and
E2 381 (15.0) 245 (9.6) 334 (13.1) 423 (16.7) 256 (10.1) N/A
355/450-500/630 KW (690 V)
315/355-400/450 kW (400 V) 383 (15.1) 244 (9.6) 334 (13.1) 424 (16.7) 109 (4.3) 149 (5.8)
Table 5.16 Power Connections
NOTE
5 5 The F-Frames have four different sizes, F1, F2, F3 and F4. The F1 and F2 consist of an inverter cabinet on the right and
rectifier cabinet on the left. The F3 and F4 have an additional options cabinet to the left of the rectifier cabinet. The F3 is an
F1 with an additional options cabinet. The F4 is an F2 with an additional options cabinet.
Terminal locations - Frame size F1 and F3
130BA849.10
3
308.3 [12.1]
253.1 [10.0]
180.3 [7.1]
1
.0 [.0]
44.40 [1.75]
244.40 [9.62]
54.4[2.1]
339.4 [13.4]
287.4 [11.3]
339.4 [13.4]
287.4 [11.3]
637.3 [25.1]
522.3 [20.6]
407.3 [16.0]
198.1[7.8] 169.4 [6.7]
282.1 [11.1] 284.4 [11.2]
.0 [.0]
.0 [.0]
.0 [.0]
2 2
318.1 [12.5]
234.1 [9.2]
[21.7]
[23.1]
[25.0]
[26.4]
465.6 [18.3]
465.6 [18.3]
551.0
572.1 [22.5] 587.0
635.0
671.0
3 3
497.1 [19.6]
129.1 [5.1]
204.1 [8.0]
Illustration 5.83 Terminal Locations - Inverter Cabinet - F1 and F3 (Front, Left and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0
level.
1) Earth ground bar
2) Motor terminals
3) Brake terminals

130BB377.10
DC ‘-’
S1
1739.1
F1
F1
805.0
765.0
1694.1
DC ‘+’
1654.1
710.0
5 5
Illustration 5.84 Terminal Locations - Regeneration Terminals - F1
and F3
Terminal locations - Frame size F2 and F4
130BA850.10
308.3 [12.14]
FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB) FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB) FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB)
253.1 [9.96]
U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98
180.3 [7.10]
1 0.0 [0.00]
287.4 [11.32]
339.4 [13.36]
0.0 [0.00]
296.4 [11.67]
431.0 [16.97]
[21.50]
[26.03]
[31.33]
[35.85]
[40.38]
0.0 [0.00]
339.4 [13.36]
287.4 [11.32]
0.0 [0.00]
66.4 [2.61]
181.4 [7.14]
2 2
1025.7
574.7 [22.63] 546.0
661.0
795.7
910.7
465.6 [18.33]
465.6 [18.33]
294.1 [11.58]
330.1 [13.00]
610.7 [24.04]
658.7 [25.93]
694.7 [27.35]
939.4 [36.98]
975.4 [38.40]
1023.4 [40.29]
1059.4 [41.71]
210.1 [8.27]
246.1 [9.69]
3 3
512.3 [20.17]
587.3 [23.12]
880.3 [34.66]
955.3 [37.61]
144.3 [5.68]
219.3 [8.63]
Illustration 5.85 Terminal Locations - Inverter Cabinet - F2 and F4 (Front, Left and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0
level.
1) Earth ground bar

130BB378.10
DC ‘-’
S1
F1
F1
F1
1739.1
1203.2
1163.2
S2
S2
S2
1694.1
DC ‘+’
1654.1
1098.1
Illustration 5.86 Terminal Locations - Regeneration Terminals - F2

and F4
5 5
Terminal locations - Rectifier (F1, F2, F3 and F4)
130BA848.11
CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22
CTI25MB CTI25MB
AUXAUX AUXAUXAUX
435.5 [17.15]
343.1 [13.51]
FASTENER TORQUE: M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB)
R/L1 91 S/L2 92 T/L3 93
193.9 [7.64] 3
1
FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB)
DC 89 DC 89
70.4 [2.77]
0.0 [0.00] 2
B
A
LOAD SHARE LOCATION

0.0 [0.0]
74.6 [2.9]
0.0 [0.00]
90.1 [3.55]
38.1 [1.50]
188.6 [7.42]
136.6 [5.38]
125.8 [4.95]
149.6 [5.89]
183.4 [7.22]
218.6 [8.61]
293.6 [11.56]
362.6 [14.28]
373.4 [14.70]
437.6 [17.23]
486.6 [19.16]
DIM F1/F2 F3/F4

A 380.5 [14.98] 29.4 [1.16]
B 432.5 [17.03] 81.4 [3.20]
Illustration 5.87 Terminal Locations - Rectifier (Left, Front and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0 level.
1) Loadshare Terminal (-)
2) Earth ground bar
3) Loadshare Terminal (+)

Terminal locations - Options Cabinet (F3 and F4)
130BA851.10
1031.4[40.61]
939.0[36.97]
5 5
1
134.6[5.30]
0.0[0.00] 0.0[1.75]
244.4[1.75]
244.4[9.62]
0.0[0.00]
75.3[2.96]
150.3[5.92]
3639[6.06]
219.6[18.65]
294[11.60]
344.0[13.54]
3639[14.33]
438.9[17.28]
0.0[0.00]
76.4[3.01]
128.4[5.05]
119.0[4.69]
171.0[6.73]
Illustration 5.88 Terminal Locations - Options Cabinet (Left, Front and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0 level.
1) Earth ground bar
Terminal locations - Options Cabinet with circuit breaker/molded case switch (F3 and F4)
130BA852.11
532.9 [20.98]
436.9 [17.20]
134.6 [5.30]
0.0 [0.00] 0.0 [0.00]

44.4 [1.75]
244.4 [9.62]
3 5
0.0 [0.00]
104.3 [4.11]
179.3 [7.06]
154.0 [6.06]
219.6 [8.65]
294.6 [11.60]
344.0 [13.54]
334.8 [13.18]
409.8 [16.14]
0.0 [0.00]
2 4
Illustration 5.89 Terminal Locations - Options Cabinet with Circuit Breaker/Molded Case Switch (Left, Front and Right Side View). The
Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0 level.
1) Earth ground bar

Power size 2 3 4 5
450 kW (480 V), 630-710 kW (690 V) 34.9 86.9 122.2 174.2
500-800 kW (480 V), 800-1000 kW (690 V) 46.3 98.3 119.0 171.0
Table 5.17 Dimension for Terminal
5.4.3 Power Connections 12-Pulse Drives See 3.1 General Specifications for correct dimensioning of
motor cable cross-section and length.
Cabling and Fusing
NOTE
Cables General
All cabling must comply with national and local
5 5 regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient
temperature. UL applications require 75 °C copper
conductors. 75 and 90 °C copper conductors are thermally
acceptable for the frequency converter to use in non-UL
applications.
The power cable connections are situated as shown in

Illustration 5.90. Dimensioning of cable cross section must
be done in accordance with the current ratings and local
legislation. See 3.1 General Specifications for details.
For protection of the frequency converter, the

recommended fuses must be used or the unit must be
fitted with built-in fuses. Recommended fuses can be seen
in 5.3.7 Fuses . Always ensure that proper fusing is made
according to local regulations.
The mains connection is fitted to the mains switch if

included.
130BB693.10
6 Phase 91-1 (L1-1)
power 92-1 (L2-1)
input 93-1 (L3-1)
91-2 (L1-2)
92-2 (L2-2)
93-2 (L3-2)
95 PE
Illustration 5.90 Mains Connection
NOTE
The motor cable must be screened/armoured. If an
unscreened/unarmoured cable is used, some EMC
requirements are not complied with. Use a screened/
armoured motor cable to comply with EMC emission
specifications. For more information, see 5.10 EMC-correct
Installation.

130BB758.11
91-1
92-1 Rectifier 1
93-1
Inverter2
Inverter1
F10/F11
Inverter3
F12/F13
91-2
92-2 Rectifier 2
93-2
95
A
* F10/F11/F12/F13 Only
5 5
R1 91-1
S1 92-1 Rectifier 1
T1
Inverter2
Inverter1
93-1
Inverter3
F10/F11
F12/F13
F8/F9
R2 91-2
S2 92-2 Rectifier 2
T2 93-2
95
B
* F10/F11/F12/F13 Only
R1 91-1
S1 92-1 Rectifier 1
T1
Inverter2
Inverter1
93-1
Inverter3
F10/F11
F12/F13
F8/F9
R2 91-2
S2 92-2 Rectifier 2
T2 93-2
C 95
Illustration 5.91
A) 6-Pulse Connection1), 2), 3)
B) Modified 6-Pulse Connection2), 3), 4)
C) 12-Pulse Connection3), 5)
Notes: 5)No paralleling of mains cabling is shown here. 12 pulse

1) Parallel connection shown. A single three-phase cable as a 6 pulse should have mains cable requirements of
may be used with sufficient carrying capability. Shorting equal number of cables and lengths.
bus bars must be installed.
2) 6-pulse connection eliminates the harmonics reduction
NOTE
benefits of the 12-pulse rectifier.
Mains cables should be equal length (±10%) and the same
3) Suitable for IT and TN mains connection.
wire size for all three phases on both rectifier sections. A
4) In the unlikely event that one of the 6-pulse modular
12 pulse frequency converter used as a 6 pulse should
rectifiers becomes inoperable, it is possible to operate the have mains cables of equal numbers and lengths.
frequency converter at reduced load with a single 6-pulse
rectifier. Contact the factory for reconnection details.
Screening of cables
Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They
spoil the screening effect at higher frequencies. If it is
necessary to break the screen to install a motor isolator or

motor contactor, the screen must be continued at the

lowest possible HF impedance.
Connect the motor cable screen to both the de-coupling
plate of the frequency converter and to the metal housing
of the motor.
Make the screen connections with the largest possible
surface area (cable clamp). This is done by using the
supplied installation devices within the frequency
converter.
Cable-length and cross-section
The frequency converter has been EMC tested with a given
5 5 length of cable. Keep the motor cable as short as possible
to reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
Switching frequency
When frequency converters are used together with sine-
wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the
switching frequency must be set according to the
instruction in 14-01 Switching Frequency.
Term. 96 97 98 99
no.
U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0-100% of
mains voltage.
3 wires out of motor
U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected
PE1)
U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
U2, V2, and W2 to be intercon-
nected separately.
Table 5.18 Terminals

1) Protected Earth Connection
NOTE
In motors without phase insulation paper or other
insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with
voltage supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a Sine-

130BC556.10
325.6 [ 12.82 ] 339.1 [ 13.35 ]
246.0 [ 9.69 ] 1
0.0 [ 0.00 ] 0.0 [ 0.00 ]

5 5
272.9 [ 10.74 ]
220.9 [ 8.70 ]
149.1 [ 5.87 ]
97.1 [ 3.82 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
219.4 [ 8.64 ]
271.4 [ 10.69 ]
44.1 [ 1.74 ]
74.0 [ 2.91 ]
159.1 [ 6.26 ]
189.0 [ 7.44 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
274.1 [ 10.79 ]
304.0 [ 11.97 ]
393.8 [ 15.50 ]
508.8 [ 20.03 ]
623.8 [ 24.56 ]
712.0 [ 28.03 ]
Illustration 5.92 F8 (Front, Left and Right Side Views)
1) Earth ground bar

The gland plate is 42 mm below Ø level

130BC558.10
2
1
3
887.4 [ 34.94 ] 2
830.3 [ 32.69 ]
1
5 5 628.8 [ 24.75 ] 3
443.8 [ 17.47 ]
386.7 [ 15.22 ]
4
151.3 [ 5.96 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
244.4 [ 9.62 ]
314.0 [ 12.36 ]
307.3 [ 12.10 ]
369.5 [ 14.55 ]
425.0 [ 16.73 ]
448.0 [ 17.64 ]
493.0 [ 19.41 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
73.0 [ 2.87 ]
128.5 [ 5.06 ]
129.3 [ 5.09 ]
184.0 [ 7.24 ]
218.3 [ 8.59 ]
249.0 [ 9.80 ]
336.4 [ 13.24 ]
291.2 [ 11.46 ]
142.0 [ 5.59 ]
92.0 [ 3.62 ]
[ 0.00 ]
0.0
Illustration 5.93 F9 Input Options Cabinet with Disconnect and Fuses

336.4 [ 13.24 ]
302.9 [ 11.93 ]
How to Install
264.9 [ 10.43 ]
102.2 [ 4.02 ]
64.2 [ 2.53 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
151.3 [ 5.96 ]
244.4 [ 9.62 ]
400.7 [ 15.77 ]
494.5 [ 19.47 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ] 0.0 [ 0.00 ]
Illustration 5.94 F9 Input Options Cabinet with Fuse only

846.3 [ 33.32 ]
940.1 [ 37.01 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
73.0 [ 2.87 ]
2X118.0 [ 4.65 ]
128.5 [ 5.06 ]
2X170.0 [ 6.69 ]
184.0 [ 7.24 ]
2X230.0 [ 9.06 ]
249.0 [ 9.80 ]
2X282.0 [ 11.10 ]
314.0 [ 12.36 ]
2X342.0 [ 13.46 ]
369.5 [ 14.55 ]
2X394.0 [ 15.51 ]
425.0 [ 16.73 ]

1
130BC559.10
139
5 5
5 5
140
.0 [ .0 ]
54.4 [ 2.1 ]
129.1 [ 5.1 ]
169.4 [ 6.7 ]
198.1 [ 7.8 ]
204.1 [ 8.0 ] 234.1 [ 9.2 ]
How to Install
[
282.1 [ 11.1 ] 284.4 [ 11.2 ]
318.1 [ 12.5 ]
1) Earth ground bar

407.3 [ [16.0 ]
497.1 [ 19.6 ]
551.0 [ 21.7 ] 522.3 [ 20.6 ]
572.1 [ 22.5 ]
587.0 [ 23.1 ]
635.0 [ 25.0 ] 637.3 [ 25.1 ]
671.0 [ 26.4 ]
Illustration 5.95 F10/F11 Inverter Cabinet

1
.0 [ .0 ]
287.4 [ 11.3 ]
339.4 [ 13.4 ]
465.6 [ 18.3 ]

.0 [ .0 ]
180.3 [ 7.1 ]
44.40 [ 1.75]
308.3 [ 12.1]
253.1 [ 10.0 ]
244.40 [ 9.62 ]
465.6 [ 18.3 ]
339.4 [ 13.4 ]
287.4 [ 11.3 ]
.0 [ .0 ]
130BC561.10
How to Install
308.9 [ 12.16 ]
1) Earth ground bar

226.7 [ 8.93 ]
205.2 [ 8.08 ]
153.2 [ 6.03 ]
103.2 [ 4.06 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
Illustration 5.96 F10/F12 Rectifier Cabinet

0.0
44.4
56.6
203.1
253.1
273.1
[ 0.00 ]
[ 1.75 ]
[ 2.23 ]
[ 8.00 ]
[ 9.96 ]
244.4 [ 9.62 ]
[ 10.75 ]
0.0 [ 0.00]
53.2 [ 2.09 ]
100.5 [ 3.96 ]
122.7 [ 4.83 ]
139.5 [ 5.49 ]
168.2 [ 6.62 ]
199.5 [ 7.86 ]

237.7 [ 9.36 ]
283.2 [ 11.15 ]
352.7 [ 13.89 ]
406.1 [ 15.99 ]
464.5 [ 18.29 ]
475.6 [ 18.72 ]
521.1 [ 20.51 ]
524.5 [ 20.65 ]
590.6 [ 23.25 ]
629.9 [ 24.80 ]
636.1 [ 25.04 ]
705.6 [ 27.78 ]
1
130BC555.10
141
5 5
5 5
142
How to Install
321.2 [ 12.65 ]
1) Earth ground bar

179.2 [ 7.06 ]
135.2 [ 5.32 ]
80.4 [ 3.17 ]
36.4 [ 1.43 ]
.0 [ .00 ]
.0 [ .00 ]
151.3 [ 5.96 ]
440.4 [ 17.34 ]
547.8 [ 21.57 ]
Illustration 5.97 F11/F13 Input Option Cabinet with Disconnect and Fuses
.0 [ .00 ]
73.0 [ 2.87 ] 88.1 [ 3.47 ]

112.0 [ 4.41 ]

138.9 [ 5.47 ]
172.0 [ 6.77 ] 180.7 [ 7.12 ]
232.0 [ 9.13 ] 231.5 [ 9.12 ]
273.3 [ 10.76 ]
338.9 [ 13.34 ] 324.1 [ 12.76 ]
387.8 [ 15.27 ]
437.0 [ 17.20 ] 438.6 [ 17.27 ]
497.0 [ 19.57 ] 480.4 [ 18.91 ]
531.2 [ 20.91 ]
557.0 [ 21.93 ] 573.0 [ 22.56 ]
602.3 [ 23.71 ]
623.8 [ 24.56 ]
130BC557.10
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
66.4 [ 2.61 ]
139.7 [ 5.50 ] 181.4 [ 7.14 ]
210.1 [ 8.27 ]
209.7 [ 8.25 ] 246.1 [ 9.69 ]
294.1 [ 11.58 ]
How to Install
296.4 [ 11.67 ]
330.1 [ 13.00 ]
431.0 [ 16.97 ]
495.2 [ 19.50 ]
546.0 [ 21.50 ]
574.7 [ 22.63 ]
1) Earth ground bar

610.7 [ 24.04 ]
658.7 [ 25.93 ]
661.0 [ 26.03 ]
694.7 [ 27.35 ]
795.7 [ 31.33 ]
850.7 [ 33.49 ]
910.7 [ 35.85 ]
920.7 [ 36.25 ]
939.4 [ 36.98 ]
975.4 [ 38.40 ]
1023.4 [ 40.29 ]
1025.7 [ 40.38 ]
1059.4 [ 41.71 ]

1
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
Illustration 5.98 F12/F13 Inverter Cabinet, Front, Left and Right Side Views)
287.4 [ 11.32 ]
339.4 [ 13.36 ]
465.6 [ 18.33 ]

0.0 [ 0.00 ]
180.3 [ 7.10 ]
253.0 [ 9.96 ]
308.3 [ 12.14]
465.6 [ 18.33 ]
339.4 [ 13.36 ]
287.4 [ 11.32 ]
0.0 [ 0.00 ]
130BC560.10
143
5 5
5.4.4 Shielding against Electrical Noise
F-Frame size units only

Before mounting the mains power cable, mount the EMC
metal cover to ensure best EMC performance.
NOTE
The EMC metal cover is only included in units with an RFI
filter
175ZT975.10
5 5
Illustration 5.99 Mounting of EMC shield
5.4.5 External Fan Power Supply
Frame sizes E and F

In case the frequency converter is supplied by DC or if the
fan must run independently of the mains supply, an
external power supply can be applied. The connection is
made on the power card.
Terminal no. Function

100, 101 Auxiliary supply S, T
102, 103 Internal supply S, T
Table 5.19 External Power Supply
The connector located on the power card provides the

connection of line voltage for the cooling fans. The fans
are connected at the factory to connect to a common AC
line (jumpers between 100-102 and 101-103). If external
supply is needed, the jumpers are removed and the supply
is connected to terminals 100 and 101. Use a 5 Amp fuse
for protection. In UL applications, use a LittelFuse KLK-5 or
equivalent.

5.5 Input Options

5.5.1 Mains Disconnects
Frame size Power Type

380-500V
D5h/D6h N110-N160 ABB OT400U03
E1/E2 P250 ABB OETL-NF600A
E1/E2 P315-P400 ABB OETL-NF800A
F3 P450 Merlin Gerin NPJF36000S12AAYP
F3
F4
P500-P630
P710-P800
Merlin Gerin NRKF36000S20AAYP
Merlin Gerin NRKF36000S20AAYP
5 5
525-690V
D5h/D6h N75K-N160 ABB OT400U03
F3 P630-P710 Merlin Gerin NPJF36000S12AAYP
F3 P800 Merlin Gerin NRKF36000S20AAYP
F4 P900-P1M2 Merlin Gerin NRKF36000S20AAYP
Table 5.20 Mains Disconnects, D, E and F frame Frequency Converters
Frame size Power Type

380-500 V
F9 P250 ABB OETL-NF600A
F11 P630 ABB OT800U21
525-690 V
F9 P355 ABB OT400U12-121
F9 P400 ABB OT400U12-121
F9 P500 ABB OT400U12-121
F9 P560 ABB OT400U12-121
F11 P800 ABB OT800U21
F13 P900 ABB OT800U21
F13 P1M0 Merlin Gerin NPJF36000S12AAYP
F13 P1M2 Merlin Gerin NPJF36000S12AAYP
Table 5.21 Mains Disconnects, 12-Pulse Frequency Converters

Default breaker settings (Trip level - Amps)

Frame Size Voltage [V] Drive Model Circuit Breaker Type I1 (Overload) I3/Ith (Instantaneous)
D6h 380-480 N110 - N132 ABB T5L400TW 400 4000
D6h 380-480 N160 ABB T5LQ400TW 400 4000
D8h 380-480 N200 ABB T6L600TW 600 6000
D8h 380-480 N250 ABB T6LQ600TW 600 6000
D8h 380-480 N315 ABB T6LQ800TW 800 8000
D6h 525-690 N75K - N160 ABB T5L400TW 400 4000

D8h 525-690 N200 - N315 ABB T6L600TW 600 6000
D8h 525-690 N400 ABB T6LQ600TW 600 6000
5 5 Table 5.22 D-frame Circuit Breakers
Frame size Power & Voltage Type Default breaker settings

Trip level [A] Time [s]
P450 380-500V & P630-P710
F3 525-690V Merlin Gerin NPJF36120U31AABSCYP 1200 0.5
P500-P630 380-500V & P800
F3 525-690V Merlin Gerin NRJF36200U31AABSCYP 2000 0.5
P710 380-500V & P900-P1M2
F4 525-690V Merlin Gerin NRJF36200U31AABSCYP 2000 0.5
F4 P800 380-500V Merlin Gerin NRJF36250U31AABSCYP 2500 0.5
Table 5.23 F-frame Circuit Breakers
5.5.2 Mains Contactors
Frame size Power & Voltage Type

N110-N160 380-480 V
D6h N75-N160 525-690 V CK95BE311N
N200-N315 380-480 V
D8h N200-N400 525-690 V CK11CE311N
Table 5.24 D-Frame Contactors
Frame size Power & Voltage Type

F3 P450-P500 380-500 V & P630-P800 525-690 V Eaton XTCE650N22A
F3 P560 380-500 V Eaton XTCE820N22A
F3 P630 380-500 V Eaton XTCEC14P22B
F4 P900 525-690 V Eaton XTCE820N22A
F4 P710-P800 380-500 V & P1M2 525-690 V Eaton XTCEC14P22B
Table 5.25 F-Frame Contactors
NOTE
Customer supplied 230 V supply is required for mains contactors.

5.5.3 Relay Output D frame Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in 5-40 Function Relay,
5-41 On Delay, Relay, and 5-42 Off Delay, Relay.
Relay 1
• Terminal 01: common Additional relay outputs by using option module MCB 105.
• Terminal 02: normal open 400 V AC
130BA047.10
• Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC
Relay 2
• Terminal 04: common relay1
03

Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in 5-40 Function Relay, 02
240Vac, 2A
5 5
5-41 On Delay, Relay, and 5-42 Off Delay, Relay.
Additional relay outputs by using option module MCB 105.

01
130BC554.10
relay2
relay1 06
03 240Vac, 2A
240Vac, 2A 05
02 400Vac, 2A
400Vac, 2A
04
01
relay2
Illustration 5.101 E- and F-frame Additional Relay Outputs
06
240Vac, 2A
5.6 Final Set-Up and Test
05
400Vac, 2A To test the set-up and ensure that the frequency converter
is running, follow these steps.
04
Step 1. Locate the motor name plate.
Illustration 5.100 D-frame Additional Relay Outputs NOTE

The motor is either star- (Y) or delta- connected (Δ). This
information is on the motor name plate data.
5.5.4 Relay Output E & F-Frame
Step 2. Enter the motor name plate data in this parameter
Relay 1 list.
• Terminal 01: common To access this list, first press [Quick Menu], then select “Q2
Quick Setup”.

1. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Relay 2
2. 1-22 Motor Voltage
• Terminal 04: common
3. 1-23 Motor Frequency
4. 1-24 Motor Current
5. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Step 3. Activate the Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). 1. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
2. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
Performing an AMA ensures optimum performance. The
AMA measures the values from the motor model
equivalent diagram. 5.7 Safe Stop Installation
1. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or set
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to [0] No function To carry out an installation of a Category 0 Stop
(EN60204) in conformance with Safety Category 3
2. Activate the AMA 1-29 Automatic Motor
(EN954-1), follow these instructions:
Adaptation (AMA).
1. The bridge (jumper) between Terminal 37 and 24
3. Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If an V DC of FC 202 must be removed. Cutting or
LC filter is mounted, run only the reduced AMA, breaking the jumper is not sufficient. Remove it
5 5 or remove the LC filter during the AMA
procedure.
entirely to avoid short-circuiting. See jumper on
Illustration 5.102.
4. Press [OK]. The display shows “Press [Hand On] to 2. Connect terminal 37 to 24 V DC by a short-circuit
start”. protected cable. The 24 V DC voltage supply
5. Press [Hand On]. A progress bar indicates must be interruptible by an EN954-1 Category 3
whether the AMA is in progress. circuit interrupt device. If the interrupt device and
the frequency converter are placed in the same
Stop the AMA during operation
installation panel, use a regular cable instead of a
1. Press [Off] - the frequency converter enters into
protected one.
alarm mode and the display shows that the AMA
was terminated.
130BT314.10
Successful AMA
1. The display shows “Press [OK] to finish AMA”.
2. Press [OK] to exit the AMA state.
Unsuccessful AMA
1. The frequency converter enters into alarm mode.
A description of the alarm can be found in
8 Troubleshooting.
12 37
2. "Report Value” in the [Alarm Log] shows that the
last measuring sequence carried out by the AMA,
before the frequency converter entered alarm
mode. This number along with the description of
the alarm helps with troubleshooting. If
contacting Danfoss Service, make sure to mention
number and alarm description.
NOTE
AMA often fails because of incorrectly registered motor
name plate data or too great a difference between the Illustration 5.102 Bridge Jumper between Terminal 37 and 24 V
motor power size and the frequency converter power size. DC
Step 4. Set speed limit and ramp time.

Illustration 5.103 shows a Stopping Category 0 (EN 60204-1)
Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time. with safety Cat. 3 (EN 954-1). An opening door contact
causes the circuit interrupt. The illustration also shows how
to connect a non-safety related hardware coast.
1. 3-02 Minimum Reference
2. 3-03 Maximum Reference
1. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor
Speed Low Limit [Hz]
2. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor
Speed High Limit [Hz]

Door contact
130BA543.10
Coast
Mains
Safety device Cat.3

(Circuit interrupt
device, possibly
with
release input)
FC 200
12
37
Safe Control
5 5
channel board
Short-circuit protected cable
(if not inside installation cabinet)
5Vdc Inverter
Illustration 5.103 Essential Aspects of an Installation to Achieve a Stopping Category 0 (EN 60204-1) with Safety Cat. 3 (EN 954-1)
5.7.1 Safe Stop Commissioning Test 5. If all four test steps are completed successfully,
the commissioning test is complete.
After installation and before first operation, perform a
commissioning test of an installation or application using
5.8 Installation of Miscellaneous
FC 200 Safe Stop.
Perform the test after each modification of the installation
Connections
or application, of which the FC 200 Safe Stop is part.
5.8.1 RS-485 Bus Connection
The commissioning test: One or more frequency converters can be connected to a
1. Remove the 24 V DC voltage supply to terminal control (or master) using the RS-485 standardised interface.
37 by the interrupt device while the frequency Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal (TX+, RX+), while
converter drives the motor (mains supply is not terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX-, RX-).
interrupted). The test step is passed if the motor
reacts with a coast and the mechanical brake (if
If more than one frequency converter is connected to a
connected) is activated.
master, use parallel connections.
2. Send a Reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or [Reset]
key). The test step is passed if the motor remains
130BA060.11
in the Safe Stop state, and the mechanical brake

(if connected) remains activated.
3. Reapply 24 V DC to terminal 37. The test step is
passed if the motor remains in the coasted state,
and the mechanical brake (if connected) remains RS 232 + 68 69 68 69 68 69
activated. USB
-
RS 485
4. Send a Reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or [Reset]
key). If the motor becomes operational again, this
step is not necessary.
Illustration 5.104 Parallel Connections

To avoid potential equalising currents in the screen, earth 5.8.3.1 MCT 10

the cable screen via terminal 61, which is connected to the
frame via an RC-link. MCT 10 has been designed as an easy to use interactive
tool for setting parameters in our frequency converters.
For EMC correct installation, refer to 5.10 EMC-correct Instal- The MCT 10 Set-up Software is useful for:
lation.
• Planning a communication network off-line. MCT
10 contains a complete frequency converter
Bus termination database
Terminate the RS-485 bus using a resistor network at both
ends. For this purpose, set switch S801 on the control card • Commissioning frequency converters on line
for "ON". • Saving settings for all frequency converters
5 5
For more information, see 5.3.16 Switches S201, S202 and
S801.
• Replacing a frequency converter in a network
• Expanding an existing network

Communication protocol must be set to 8-30 Protocol. • Future developed frequency converters will be
supported
5.8.2 How to Connect a PC to the Unit
MCT 10
To control or program the frequency converter from a PC, Set-up Software support Profibus DP-V1 via a Master class
install the MCT 10 Set-up Software. 2 connection, which makes it possible to on line read/write
The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB parameters in a frequency converter via the Profibus
cable, or via the RS-485 interface. network, eliminating the need for an extra communication
network.
NOTE Save drive settings:
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the 1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software
The USB connection is connected to protection earth on
the frequency converter. Use only isolated laptop as PC 3. Choose “Read from drive”
connection to the USB connector on the frequency 4. Choose “Save as”
converter.
All parameters are now stored in the PC.
Load drive settings:
130BT308.10
1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port

2. Open MCT 10 Set-up software
3. Choose “Open”– to view stored files
4. Open the appropriate file
5. Choose “Write to drive”
All parameter settings are now transferred to the
frequency converter.
A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available.
The MCT 10 Set-up Software Modules
The following modules are included in the software
package:
Illustration 5.105 Connection of PC to Frequency Converter
MCT 10 Setup Software
• Setting parameters
5.8.3 PC Software Tools • Copy to and from frequency converters
• Documentation and print out of parameter

All frequency converters are equipped with a serial settings incl. diagrams
communication port. A PC tool for communication
between PC and frequency converter is available. Ext. User Interface
• Preventive Maintenance Schedule
• Clock settings

• Timed Action Programming
• Smart Logic Controller Set-up 5.10 EMC-correct Installation

• Cascade Control Config. Tool
5.10.1 Electrical Installation - EMC
Ordering number: Precautions
Order the CD containing MCT 10 Set-up Software using
code number 130B1000.
The following is a guideline to good engineering practice
MCT 10 can also be downloaded from www.danfoss.com/ when installing frequency converters. Follow these
BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Softwaredownload/. guidelines in compliance with EN 61800-3 First
environment. If the installation is in EN 61800-3 Second
5.8.3.2 MCT 31 environment, industrial networks, or in an installation with
MCT 31
its own transformer, deviation from these guidelines is
allowed but not recommended. See also 2.3.3 Danfoss 5 5
The MCT 31 harmonic calculation PC tool enables easy Frequency Converter and CE Labelling, 2.9.3 EMC Test Results
estimation of the harmonic distortion in a given (Emission) and 5.10.3 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control
application. Both the harmonic distortion of Danfoss Cables.
frequency converters as well as non-Danfoss frequency
converters with additional harmonic reduction devices, Good engineering practice to ensure EMC-correct
such as Danfoss AHF filters and 12-18-pulse rectifiers, can electrical installation:
be calculated. • Use only braided screened/armoured motor
cables and braided screened control cables. The
Ordering number:
screen provides a minimum coverage of 80%. The
Order the CD containing the MCT 31 PC tool using code
screen material must be metal, not limited to but
number 130B1031.
typically copper, aluminum, steel, or lead. There
MCT 31 can also be downloaded from www.danfoss.com/ are no special requirements for the mains cable.
BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Softwaredownload/.
• Installations using rigid metal conduits are not
required to use screened cable, but the motor
5.9 Safety cable must be installed in conduit separate from
the control and mains cables. Full connection of
5.9.1 High Voltage Test the conduit from the frequency converter to the
motor is required. The EMC performance of
Carry out a high voltage test by short-circuiting terminals flexible conduits varies a lot and information from
U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3. Energize maximum 2.15 kV DC for the manufacturer must be obtained.
380-500V frequency converters and 2.525 kV DC for 525–
• Connect the screen conduit to earth at both ends
690 V frequency converters for one second between this for motor cables as well as for control cables. In
short-circuit and the chassis. some cases, it is not possible to connect the
screen in both ends. If so, connect the screen at
WARNING the frequency converter. See also 5.3.3
Connection to Mains and Earthing.
When running high voltage tests of the entire installation,
interrupt the mains and motor connection if the leakage • Avoid terminating the screen with twisted ends
currents are too high. (pigtails). It increases the high frequency
impedance of the screen, which reduces its
effectiveness at high frequencies. Use low
5.9.2 Safety Earth Connection
impedance cable clamps or EMC cable glands
instead.
The frequency converter has a high leakage current and
must be earthed appropriately for safety reasons according • Avoid using unscreened motor or control cables
to EN 50178. inside cabinets housing the frequency converter,
whenever possible.
WARNING Leave the screen as close to the connectors as possible.
The earth leakage current from the frequency converter

Illustration 5.106 shows an example of an EMC-correct
exceeds 3.5 mA. To ensure a good mechanical connection
electrical installation of an IP 20 frequency converter. The
from the earth cable to the earth connection (terminal 95),
frequency converter is fitted in an installation cabinet with
the cable cross-section must be at least 10 mm2 or 2 rated
an output contactor and connected to a PLC, which is
earth wires terminated separately.

installed in a separate cabinet. Other ways of doing the used, some emission requirements are not complied with,
installation could have just as good an EMC performance, although the immunity requirements are fulfilled. See
provided the guidelines to engineering practice are 2.9.3 EMC Test Results (Emission).
followed.
If the installation is not carried out according to the

guideline and if unscreened cables and control wires are
130BA048.13
5 5 PLC etc. Panel
Output con-
tactor etc.
PLC
Earthing rail
Cable insula-
tion stripped
Min. 16 mm2
Equalizing cable
All cable entries in

one side of panel
Control cables
Min. 200mm Motor cable

between con-
trol cables,
Mains-supply motor cable and
mains cable
L1
L2
L3
PE Motor, 3 phases and
Reinforced protective earth
Protective earth
Illustration 5.106 EMC-correct Electrical Installation of a Frequency Converter in Cabinet

L1 • Twisted copper wire or screened steel wire cable
130BA175.12
L2
L3 • Single-layer braided copper wire with varying
N percentage screen coverage
PE
• Double-layer braided copper wire
F1
• Twin layer of braided copper wire with a
magnetic, screened/armoured intermediate layer
91 92 93 95
12 • Cable that runs in copper tube or steel tube
L1 L2 L3 PE
37 • Lead cable with 1.1 mm wall thickness
18
175ZA166.13
50 Transfer impedance, Z a
mOhm/m t
5 5
53 5 kΩ
55 105
U V W PE
54 104 b
96 97 98 99 Transmitter
103
The lower the Z the better the cable screening performance

c
102
101
M
3 d
1
Illustration 5.107 Electrical Connection Diagram (6-pulse example
shown) e
10ˉ1
10ˉ2 f
5.10.2 Use of EMC-Correct Cables
10ˉ3
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 MHz
Danfoss recommends braided screened/armoured cables to g
optimise EMC immunity of the control cables and the EMC
emission from the motor cables.
Illustration 5.108 Transfer Impedance ZT
The ability of a cable to reduce the incoming and
outgoing radiation of electric noise depends on the
transfer impedance (ZT). The screen of a cable is normally 5.10.3 Earthing of Screened/Armoured
designed to reduce the transfer of electric noise; however, Control Cables
a screen with a lower transfer impedance (ZT) value is
more effective than a screen with a higher transfer Generally speaking, control cables must be braided
impedance (ZT). screened/armoured and the screen must be connected
with a cable clampat both ends to the metal cabinet of
Cable manufacturers rare state transfer impedance (ZT) but the unit.
it is often possible to estimate transfer impedance (ZT) by
assessing the physical design of the cable. Illustration 5.109 indicates how correct earthing is carried
out and what to do when in doubt.
Transfer impedance (ZT) can be assessed based on the
following factors: a. Correct earthing
• The conductibility of the screen material Control cables and cables for serial communi-
• The contact resistance between the individual cation must be fitted with cable clamps at both
screen conductors ends to ensure the best possible electrical
contact.
• The screen coverage, which consists of the
physical area of the cable covered by the screen - b. Wrong earthing
often stated as a percentage value Do not use twisted cable ends (pigtails). They
increase the screen impedance at high
• Screen type–braided or twisted pattern
frequencies.
• Aluminum-clad with copper wire

c. Protection regarding earth potential between PLC PLC etc.
130BA051.11
and frequency converter FC
If the earth potential between the frequency
converter and the PLC is different, electric noise
can occur that disturbs the entire system. Solve
this problem by fitting an equalising cable next
to the control cable. Minimum cable cross- PE PE a
section: 16 mm2.
d. For 50/60 Hz earth loops
If long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz earth PLC etc.
loops are possible. Solve this problem by FC
5 5 connecting one end of the screen to earth via a

100 nF capacitor (keeping leads short).
e. Cables for serial communication
Eliminate low-frequency noise currents between
two frequency converters by connecting one end PE PE b
of the screen to terminal 61. This terminal is

connected to earth via an internal RC link. Use
twisted-pair cables for reducing the differential PLC etc.
mode interference between the conductors. FC
PE PE
PE PE c
Min. 16mm2
Equalizing cable
PLC etc.
FC
PE
100nF PE d
FC FC
69 68
68 69
61
PE
e
Illustration 5.109 Earthing

5.11 Residual Current Device

Use RCD relays, multiple protective earthing, or earthing as
extra protection to comply with local safety regulations.
If an earth fault appears, a DC content could develop in
the faulty current.
If RCD relays are used, local regulations must be observed.
Relays must be suitable for protection of 3-phase
equipment with a bridge rectifier and for a brief discharge
on power-up see 2.12 Earth Leakage Current for further
information.
5 5

Application Examples VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
6 Application Examples
6.1.2 Pulse Start/Stop

6.1 Typical Application Examples
Terminal 18 = start/stop 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
6.1.1 Start/Stop Latched start
Terminal 27= Stop 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] Stop
Terminal 18 = start/stop 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] inverse
Start
Terminal 27 = No operation 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Latched start
[0] No operation (Default coast inverse 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = Stop inverse
130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
P 5 - 10[9]
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Start (default)
6 6
+24V
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = coast inverse
(default)
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
130BA155.12
P 5-10 [8]
P 5-12 [0]
+24V
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Start Stop inverse Safe Stop

Start/Stop Safe Stop
Speed Speed
Start/Stop
[18]
Illustration 6.1 Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop
Function!
Start (18)
Start (27)
Illustration 6.2 Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop

Function!

6.1.3 Potentiometer Reference stator resistance, Rs. Normally, this increase is not
critical.
Voltage reference via a potentiometer. • AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor
current is minimum 35% of the rated output
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] = Analog Input 53 current of the frequency converter. AMA can be
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage = 0 V carried out on up to one oversize motor.
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage = 10 V • It is possible to carry out a reduced AMA test
with a Sine-wave filter installed. Avoid carrying
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value = 0 RPM out a complete AMA with a Sine-wave filter. If an
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value = 1.500 overall setting is required, remove the Sine-wave
RPM filter while running a total AMA. After completion
of the AMA, reinsert the Sine-wave filter.
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
• If motors are coupled in parallel, use only
130BA287.10
+10V/30mA
reduced AMA if any.
• Avoid running a complete AMA when using 6 6

Speed RPM synchronous motors. If synchronous motors are
P 6-15 39 42 50 53 54 55
applied, run a reduced AMA and manually set the
extended motor data. The AMA function does not
apply to permanent magnet motors.
• The frequency converter does not produce motor

Ref. voltage torque during an AMA. During an AMA, it is
P 6-11 10V imperative that the application does not force the
motor shaft to run, which is known to happen
1 kW
with wind milling in ventilation systems, for
example. This disturbs the AMA function.
Illustration 6.3 Potentiometer Reference • AMA cannot be activated when running a PM

motor (when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1]
PM non-salient SPM).
6.1.4 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

6.1.5 Smart Logic Control
AMA is an algorithm to measure the electrical motor
parameters on a motor at standstill, meaning that AMA The Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of
itself does not supply any torque. user-defined actions (see 13-52 SL Controller Action)
AMA is useful when commissioning systems and executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined
optimising the adjustment of the frequency converter to event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event) is evaluated as TRUE
the applied motor. This feature is used where the default by the SLC.
setting does not apply to the connected motor. Events and actions are each numbered and are linked in
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) allows a choice of pairs called states, which means that when event [1] is
complete AMA with determination of all electrical motor fulfilled (attains the value TRUE), action [1] is executed.
parameters or reduced AMA with determination of the After this sequence, the conditions of event [2] will be
stator resistance Rs only. evaluated and if evaluated TRUE, action [2]will be executed,
The duration of a total AMA varies from a few minutes on and so on. Events and actions are placed in array
small motors to more than 15 minutes on large motors. parameters.
Limitations and preconditions: Only one event is evaluated at any time. If an event is
evaluated as FALSE, nothing happens (in the SLC) during
• For the AMA to determine the motor parameters the present scan interval and no other events are
optimally, enter the correct motor nameplate
data in 1-20 Motor Power [kW] to 1-28 Motor evaluated, so that when the SLC starts, it evaluates event
Rotation Check. [1] (and only event [1]) each scan interval. Only when event
[1] is evaluated TRUE, the SLC executes action [1] and starts
• For the best adjustment of the frequency evaluating event [2].
converter, carry out AMA on a cold motor.
Repeated AMA runs could lead to a heating of
It is possible to program from 0 to 20 events and actions.
the motor, which results in an increase of the
When the last event/action has been executed, the

sequence starts over again from event [1]/action [1]. The 6.1.6 Smart Logic Control Programming
illustration shows an example with three events/actions:
In applications where a PLC is generating a simple
Start sequence, the SLC takes over elementary tasks from the
130BA062.13
event P13-01
main control.
State 1 SLC is designed to act from event send to or generated in
Event 1/
Action 1 State 2 the frequency converter. The frequency converter then
Stop Event 2/
event P13-02 Action 2 performs the pre-programmed action.
Stop
event P13-02
State 4
Event 4/
Action 4
State 3
Event 3/
Action 3
Stop
event P13-02
6 6 Illustration 6.4 Events and Actions
6.1.7 SLC Application Example
One sequence 1:
Start – ramp up – run at reference speed 2 seconds – ramp down and hold shaft until stop.
130BA157.11
Max. ref.
P 3-03
Preset ref.(0)
P 3-10(0) State 2 State 3
State 1
Preset ref.(1)
P 3-10(1) 2 sec 2 sec
Term 18
P 5-10(start)
Illustration 6.5 Ramp Up/Ramp Down
Set the ramping times in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time to the wanted times
tacc × nnorm ( par . 1 − 25)
tramp =
ref RPM
Set term 27 to No Operation (5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input)

Set Preset reference 0 to first preset speed (3-10 Preset Reference [0]) in percentage of Max reference speed (3-03 Maximum
Reference). Ex.: 60%
Set preset reference 1 to second preset speed (3-10 Preset Reference [1] Ex.: 0% (zero).
Set the timer 0 for constant running speed in 13-20 SL Controller Timer [0]. Ex.: 2 s
Set Event 1 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [1] to True [1]

Set Event 2 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [2] to On Reference [4]

Set Event 3 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [3] to Time Out 0 [30]

Set Event 4 in 13-51 SL Controller Event [4] to False [0]
Set Action 1 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [1] to Select preset 0 [10]

Set Action 2 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [2] to Start Timer 0 [29]
Set Action 3 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [3] to Select preset 1 [11]
Set Action 4 in 13-52 SL Controller Action [4] to No Action [1]
130BA148.11
Start Event 1 True (1)
command Action 1 Select Preset (10)
State 0
Stop 6 6
command
Event 2 On Reference (4)
Action 2 Start Timer (29)
Event 4 False (0) State 1
Action 4 No Action (1)
State 2 Event 3 Time Out (30)
Action 3 Select Preset ref. (11)
Illustration 6.6 SLC Application Example
Set the Smart Logic Control in 13-00 SL Controller Mode to ON.
Start/stop command is applied on terminal 18. If the stop signal is applied, the frequency converter ramps down and goes
into free mode.

6.1.8 BASIC Cascade Controller The command can be a manual alternation or an

alternation event signal. If the alternation event is selected,
The BASIC Cascade Controller is used for pump the lead pump alternation takes place every time the
applications where a certain pressure (“head”) or level event occurs. Selections include whenever an alternation
must be maintained over a wide dynamic range. Running a timer expires, at a predefined time of day or when the
large pump at variable speed over a wide range is not an lead pump goes into sleep mode. The actual system load
ideal solution because of low pump efficiency at lower determines staging.
speed. In a practical way, the limit is 25% of the rated full
load speed for the pump. A separate parameter limits alternation only to take place
if total capacity required is > 50%. Total pump capacity is
In the BASIC Cascade Controller, the frequency converter determined as lead pump plus fixed speed pumps
controls a variable speed (lead) motor as the variable capacities.
speed pump and can stage up to two additional constant
speed pumps on and off. By varying the speed of the Bandwidth Management
initial pump, variable speed control of the entire system is In cascade control systems, to avoid frequent switching of
6 6 provided, maintaining constant pressure while eliminating fixed speed pumps, the desired system pressure is kept
pressure surges, resulting in reduced system stress, and within a bandwidth rather than at a constant level. The
quieter operation in pumping systems. staging bandwidth provides the required bandwidth for
operation. When a large and quick change in system
Constant Speed pressure occurs, the override bandwidth overrides the
130BA362.10
Pumps (2) staging bandwidth to prevent immediate response to a

short duration pressure change. An override bandwidth
timer can be programmed to prevent staging until the
system pressure has stabilised and normal control
Variable Speed established.
Pumps (1) Pressure Sensor
When the cascade controller is enabled and the drive
issues a trip alarm, the system head is maintained by
staging and destaging fixed speed pumps. To prevent
frequent staging and destaging and minimise pressure
Motor starter
Frequency Converter
fluctuations, a wider fixed speed bandwidth is used instead
with of the staging bandwidth.
Cascade Controller
Illustration 6.7 BASIC Cascade Controller
Fixed Lead Pump

The motors must be of equal size. The BASIC Cascade
Controller allows the frequency converter to control up to
three equal size pumps using the frequency converter’s
two built-in relays. When the variable pump (lead) is
connected directly to the frequency converter, the two
built-in relays control the other two pumps. When lead
pump alternations are enabled, pumps are connected to
the built-in relays and the frequency converter can operate
two pumps.
Lead Pump Alternation
The motors must be of equal size. This function makes it
possible to cycle the frequency converter between the
pumps in the system (maximum of two pumps). In this
operation, the run time between pumps is equalised
reducing the required pump maintenance and increasing
reliability and lifetime of the system. The alternation of the
lead pump can take place at a command signal or at
staging (adding another pump).

6.1.9 Pump Staging with Lead Pump and emergency has stopped all pumps, all pumps
Alternation are running, fixed speed pumps are being
staged/de-staged and lead pump alternation is
With lead pump alternation enabled, a maximum of two occurring.
pumps are controlled. At an alternation command, the PID • De-stage at no-flow ensures that all fixed speed
stops, the lead pump ramps to minimum frequency (fmin) pumps are stopped individually until the no-flow
and after a delay, it ramps to maximum frequency (fmax). status disappears.
When the speed of the lead pump reaches the de-staging
frequency, the fixed speed pump is cut out (de-staged).
The lead pump continues to ramp up and then ramps
down to a stop and the two relays are cut out.
Alternation
130BA364.10
command/PID stops
f max
Destaging freq. Mains operation
f min
Time 6 6
PID contr.
starts
f max
Staging freq.
Mains operation
5s Time
Illustration 6.8 Lead Pump Alternation
After a time delay, the relay for the fixed speed pump cuts
in (staged) and this pump becomes the new lead pump.
The new lead pump ramps up to maximum speed and
then down to minimum speed. When ramping down and
reaching the staging frequency, the old lead pump is now
cut in (staged) on the mains as the new fixed speed pump.
If the lead pump has been running at minimum frequency

(fmin) for a programmed amount of time, with a fixed
speed pump running, the lead pump contributes little to
the system. When programmed value of the timer expires,
the lead pump is removed avoiding water heating
problems.
6.1.10 System Status and Operation
If the lead pump goes into sleep mode, the function is

displayed on the LCP. It is possible to alternate the lead
pump on a sleep mode condition.
When the cascade controller is enabled, the operation

status for each pump and the cascade controller is
displayed on the LCP. Information displayed includes:
• Pumps Status, is a read out of the status for the

relays assigned to each pump. The display shows
pumps that are disabled, off, running on the
frequency converter or running on the mains/
motor starter.
• Cascade Status, is a read out of the status for the

Cascade Controller. The display shows that the
Cascade Controller is disabled, all pumps are off,

6.1.11 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram shows an example with the built-in BASIC Cascade Controller with one variable speed pump (lead) and
two fixed speed pumps, a 4–20 mA transmitter and System Safety Interlock.
130BA378.10
Power Card Control Card
(Safety Interlock)
(Feedback 1 res.)
pump 1.)
pump 2.)
(cascade
(cascade
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
D IN1/D OUT
D IN1/D OUT
COM A OUT
+ 24V OUT
+ 10V OUT
+24V OUT
COM D IN
COM A IN
A OUT1
(Start)
D IN 1
D IN 1
D IN 1
D IN1
A IN1
A IN2
MOTOR MAINS
96 97 98 91 92 93
PE 01 02 03 04 05 06 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 39 42 50 53 54 55
U V W L1 L2 L3
6 6 System System
Start/ Safety
Stop Interlock
From Motor Control Circuitry

N Pressure
Transmitter
4-20 mA,
P
24 V dc
L1
L2
L3
PE
M M M
Illustration 6.9 Cascade Controller Wiring Diagram

6.1.12 Fixed Variable Speed Pump Wiring Diagram
L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 • K1 blocks for K2 via the mechanical interlock
130BA376.10
preventing mains to be connected to the output
of the frequency converter (via K1).
• Auxiliary break contact on K1 prevents K3 to cut

Power Section
in.
•
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 2 controls contactor K4 for on/off control

of the fixed speed pump.
• At alternation, both relays de-energize and now

RELAY 2 are energized as the first relay.
6 6
Illustration 6.10 Fixed Variable Speed Pump Wiring Diagram
6.1.13 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring

Diagram
L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3

130BA377.13
FC
R1
R2
k3 k3 K1 K1
k2 k1 K4 K3
K1 K2 K3 K4
Illustration 6.11 Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram
Every pump must be connected to two contactors (K1/K2

and K3/K4) with a mechanical interlock. Thermal relays or
other motor protection devices must be applied according
to local regulation and/or individual demands.
• RELAY 1 (R1) and RELAY 2 (R2) are the built-in

relays in the frequency converter.
• When all relays are de-energized, the first built-in

relay that is energized cuts in the contactor
corresponding to the pump controlled by the
relay. For example, RELAY 1 cuts in contactor K1,
which becomes the lead pump.

6.1.14 Start/Stop Conditions
Commands assigned to digital inputs. See parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Variable speed pump (lead) Fixed speed pumps

Start (SYSTEM START /STOP) Ramps up (if stopped and there is a Staging (if stopped and there is a demand)
demand)
Lead Pump Start Ramps up if SYSTEM START is active Not affected
Coast (EMERGENCY STOP) Coast to stop Cut out (built in relays are de-energized)
Safety Interlock Coast to stop Cut out (built in relays are de-energized)
Table 6.1 Commands Assigned to Digital Input
Variable speed pump (lead) Fixed speed pumps
6 6
Hand On Ramps up (if stopped by a normal stop Destaging (if running)
command) or stays in operation if already
running
Off Ramps down Cut out
Auto On Starts and stops according to commands via Staging/Destaging
terminals or serial bus
Table 6.2 Function of LCP Keys

RS-485 Installation and Set... VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
7 RS-485 Installation and Set-up
7.1 Introduction
RS-485 is a two-wire bus interface compatible with multi- 7.1.2 Parameter Settings for Modbus
drop network topology. Nodes can be connected as a bus, Communication
or via drop cables from a common trunk line. A total of 32
nodes can be connected to one network segment. The parameters in Table 7.2 apply to the RS-485 interface
Repeaters divide network segments. Note each repeater (FC-port)
function as a node within the segment in which it is
installed. Each node connected within a given network Parameter Function
must have a unique node address, across all segments.
8-30 Protocol Select the application protocol to run on
Terminate each segment at both ends, using either the
the RS-485 interface
termination switch (S801) of the frequency converters or a
8-31 Address Set the node address. Note: The address
biased termination resistor network. Always use screened
range depends on the protocol selected in
twisted pair (STP) cable for bus cabling, and always follow
8-30 Protocol
good common installation practice.
Low-impedance earth connection of the screen at every
8-32 Baud Rate Set the baud rate. Note: The default baud
rate depends on the protocol selected in
7 7
node is important, including at high frequencies. Thus,
8-30 Protocol
connect a large surface of the screen to earth, with a cable
8-33 Parity / Stop Set the parity and number of stop bits.
clamp or a conductive cable gland, for example. If
Bits Note: The default selection depends on the
necessary, apply potential-equalizing cables to maintain
protocol selected in 8-30 Protocol
the same earth potential throughout the network. Partic-
8-35 Minimum Specify a minimum delay time between
ularly in installations with long cables.
Response Delay receiving a request and transmitting a
To prevent impedance mismatch, always use the same
response, which can be used for
type of cable throughout the entire network. When
overcoming modem turnaround delays.
connecting a motor to the frequency converter, always use
screened motor cable. 8-36 Maximum Specify a maximum delay time between
Response Delay transmitting a request and receiving a
response.
Cable Screened twisted pair (STP)
8-37 Maximum Specify a maximum delay time between
Impedance 120 Ω
Inter-Char Delay two received bytes to ensure timeout when
Cable length Max. 1,200 m (including drop lines)
transmission is interrupted.
Max. 500 m station-to-station
Table 7.2 Modbus Communication Parameters
Table 7.1 Motor Cable
7.1.3 EMC Precautions

7.1.1 Hardware Setup
To achieve interference-free operation of the RS-485
Use the terminator dip switch on the main control board
network, the following EMC precautions are recommended.
of the frequency converter to terminate the RS-485 bus.
Relevant national and local regulations, regarding

130BA272.11
protective earth connection, for example, must be

observed. The RS-485 communication cable must be kept
ON away from motor and brake resistor cables to avoid
coupling of high frequency noise from one cable to
1 2
S801
another. Normally a distance of 200 mm (8 in) is sufficient,

Illustration 7.1 Terminator Switch Factory Setting but keeping the greatest possible distance between the
cables is recommended, especially where cables run in
parallel over long distances. When crossing is unavoidable,
the RS-485 cable must cross motor and brake resistor
NOTE cables at an angle of 90°.
The factory setting for the dip switch is OFF.

7.2.1 Modbus RTU
130BA080.11
The FC protocol provides access to the control word and
bus reference of the frequency converter.
The control word allows the Modbus master to control

Fieldbus cable
several important functions of the frequency converter:

• Start
• Stop of the frequency converter in various ways:
Coast stop
Quick stop
Min.200mm
DC Brake stop
Normal (ramp) stop
• Reset after a fault trip
• Run at various preset speeds
• Run in reverse
7 7 90° crossing • Change of the active set-up
• Control of the two relays built into the frequency

converter
The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is
also possible to access the parameters, read their values,
Illustration 7.2 EMC Precautions
and where possible, write values to them, permitting a
range of control options, including controlling the setpoint
of the frequency converter when its internal PID controller
7.2 FC Protocol Overview is used.
The FC protocol, also referred to as FC bus or Standard 7.3 Network Connection

bus, is the Danfoss standard fieldbus. It defines an access
One or more frequency converters can be connected to a
technique according to the master-slave principle for
control (or master) using the RS-485 standardised interface.
communications via a serial bus.
Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal (TX+, RX+), while
One master and a maximum of 126 slaves can be
terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX-, RX-). See
connected to the bus. The master selects the individual
drawings in 5.10.3 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control
slaves via an address character in the telegram. A slave
Cables
itself can never transmit without first being requested to
do so, and direct message transfer between the individual
slaves is not possible. Communications occur in the half- If more than one frequency converter is connected to a
duplex mode. master, use parallel connections.
The master function cannot be transferred to another node
(single-master system).
130BA060.11
The physical layer is RS-485, thus utilising the RS-485 port

built into the frequency converter. The FC protocol
supports different telegram formats:
RS 232 + 68 69 68 69 68 69
• A short format of 8 bytes for process data. USB
-
RS 485
• A long format of 16 bytes that also includes a
parameter channel.
• A format used for texts. Illustration 7.3 Parallel Connections

To avoid potential equalising currents in the screen, earth A data control byte (BCC) completes the telegram.
the cable screen via terminal 61, which is connected to the
frame via an RC-link.
195NA099.10
130BB021.10
STX LGE ADR DATA BCC
61 68 69 39 42 50 53 54 55
Illustration 7.6 Telegram Structure
Remove jumper to enable Safe Stop

7.4.3 Telegram Length (LGE)
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
The telegram length is the number of data bytes plus the

address byte ADR and the data control byte BCC.
• The length of telegrams with 4 data bytes is

LGE=4+1+1=6 bytes
• The length of telegrams with 12 data bytes is

LGE=12+1+1=14 bytes
7 7
• The length of telegrams containing texts is 101)+n
bytes
1)The 10 represents the fixed characters, while the “n’” is
Illustration 7.4 Control Card Terminals
variable (depending on the length of the text).
7.4.4 Frequency Converter Address (ADR)

7.4 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure Two different address formats are used.
The address range of the frequency converter is either 1–
7.4.1 Content of a Character (byte)
31 or 1–126.
Each character transferred begins with a start bit. Then
eight data bits are transferred, each corresponding to a 1. Address format 1–31:
byte. Each character is secured via a parity bit. This bit is
set at "1" when it reaches parity. Parity is when there is an Bit 7=0 (address format 1–31 active)
equal number of 1 characters in the eight data bits and Bit 6 is not used
the parity bit in total. A stop bit completes a character,
thus consisting of 11 bits in all. Bit 5=1: Broadcast, address bits (0–4) are not used
Bit 5=0: No Broadcast
195NA036.10
Bit 0–4=frequency converter address 1–31

Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Even Stop 2. Address format 1–126:
bit Parity bit
Illustration 7.5 Character (Byte) Bit 7=1 (address format 1–126 active)
Bit 0–6=frequency converter address 1–126
7.4.2 Telegram Structure Bit 0–6=0 Broadcast

The slave returns the address byte unchanged to the
Each telegram has the following structure: master in the response telegram.
1. Start character (STX)=02 Hex 7.4.5 Data Control Byte (BCC)

2. A byte denoting the telegram length (LGE)
The checksum is calculated as an XOR-function. Before the
3. A byte denoting the frequency converter address
first byte in the telegram is received, the Calculated
(ADR)
Checksum is 0.
A number of data bytes (variable, depending on the type
of telegram) follows.

7.4.6 The Data Field
The structure of data blocks depends on the type of telegram. There are three types, and the type applies for both control
telegrams (master⇒slave) and response telegrams (slave⇒master).
The three types of telegram are:
Process block (PCD)

The PCD is made up of a data block of 4 bytes (two words) and contains:
- Control word and reference value (from master to slave)
- Status word and present output frequency (from slave to master)
130BA269.10
STX LGE ADR PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Illustration 7.7 PCD

7 7
Parameter block
The parameter block is used to transfer parameters between master and slave. The data block is made up of 12 bytes (6
words) and also contains the process block.
130BA271.10
STX LGE ADR PKE IND PWEhigh PWElow PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Illustration 7.8 Parameter Block
Text block
The text block is used to read or write texts via the data block.
130BA270.10
STX LGE ADR PKE IND Ch1 Ch2 Chn PCD1 PCD2 BCC
Illustration 7.9 Text Block
7.4.7 The PKE Field

130BA268.10
PKE IND PWEhigh PWElow
The PKE field contains two sub fields: Parameter command

and response AK, and Parameter number PNU:
AK PNU
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Parameter
commands
and replies
Parameter
number
Illustration 7.10

Bits no. 12–15 transfer parameter commands from master 7.4.8 Parameter Number (PNU)
to slave and return processed slave responses to the
master. Bits no. 0–11 transfer parameter numbers. The function of
the relevant parameter is defined in the parameter
Bit no. Parameter command description in the Programming Guide.
15 14 13 12
0 0 0 0 No command 7.4.9 Index (IND)
0 0 0 1 Read parameter value
0 0 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM (word) The index is used together with the parameter number to
0 0 1 1 Write parameter value in RAM (double read/write-access parameters with an index, for example,
word) 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code. The index consists of 2 bytes,
1 1 0 1 Write parameter value in RAM and a low byte and a high byte.
EEprom (double word)
1 1 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM and Only the low byte is used as an index.
EEprom (word)
1 1 1 1 Read/write text 7.4.10 Parameter Value (PWE)
7 7
Table 7.3 Parameter Commands Master⇒Slave
The parameter value block consists of two words (4 bytes),
Bit no. Response
and the value depends on the defined command (AK). The
master prompts for a parameter value when the PWE block
15 14 13 12
contains no value. To change a parameter value (write),
0 0 0 0 No response
write the new value in the PWE block and send from the
0 0 0 1 Parameter value transferred (word)
master to the slave.
0 0 1 0 Parameter value transferred (double
word)
When a slave responds to a parameter request (read
0 1 1 1 Command cannot be performed
command), the present parameter value in the PWE block
1 1 1 1 text transferred
is transferred and returned to the master. If a parameter
Table 7.4 Response Slave⇒Master contains not a numerical value but several data options,
for example, 0-01 Language [0] English, and [4] Danish,
If the command cannot be performed, the slave sends this select the data value by entering the value in the PWE
response: block. See example - selecting a data value. Serial
0111 Command cannot be performed communication is only capable of reading parameters
- and issues the following fault report in the parameter containing data type 9 (text string).
value (PWE):
15-40 FC Type to 15-53 Power Card Serial Number contain
PWE low Fault report data type 9.
(Hex) For example, read the unit size and mains voltage range in
0 The parameter number used does not exist
15-40 FC Type. When a text string is transferred (read), the
length of the telegram is variable, and the texts are of
1 There is no write access to the defined parameter
different lengths. The telegram length is defined in the
2 Data value exceeds the parameter limits
second byte of the telegram, LGE. When using text
3 The sub index used does not exist
transfer, the index character indicates whether it is a read
4 The parameter is not the array type
or a write command.
5 The data type does not match the defined
parameter
To read a text via the PWE block, set the parameter
11 Data change in the defined parameter is not
command (AK) to ’F’ Hex. The index character high-byte
possible in the present mode of the frequency
must be “4.”
converter. Certain parameters can only be
changed when the motor is turned off
Some parameters contain text that can be written via the
82 There is no bus access to the defined parameter
serial bus. To write a text via the PWE block, set the
83 Data change is not possible because factory setup
parameter command (AK) to ’F’ Hex. The index characters
is selected
high-byte must be “5.”
Table 7.5 Fault Report

PKE IND PWE high PWE low Conversion index Conversion factor
130BA275.10
Read text Fx xx 04 00 100
75
Write text Fx xx 05 00 74
Illustration 7.11 PWE 67
6 1000000
5 100000
7.4.11 Data Types Supported 4 10000
3 1000
Unsigned means that there is no operational sign in the 2 100
telegram. 1 10
0 1
Data types Description -1 0.1
3 Integer 16 -2 0.01
4 Integer 32 -3 0.001
5 Unsigned 8 -4 0.0001
6 Unsigned 16 -5 0.00001
7 7 7
9
Unsigned 32
Text string
-6
-7
0.000001
0.0000001
10 Byte string
Table 7.7 Conversion Table
13 Time difference
33 Reserved
35 Bit sequence 7.4.13 Process Words (PCD)
Table 7.6 Data Types Supported The block of process words is divided into two blocks of
16 bits, which always occur in the defined sequence.
7.4.12 Conversion
PCD 1 PCD 2
The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in Control Telegram (master⇒slave Control Reference-value
the section factory settings. Parameter values are word)
transferred as whole numbers only. Conversion factors are Control Telegram (slave⇒master) Status word Present output
therefore used to transfer decimals. frequency
Table 7.8 PCD

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of
0.1.
To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer the 7.5 Examples
value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the value
transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is thus 7.5.1 Writing a Parameter Value
perceived as 10.0.
Change 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] to 100 Hz.
Examples: Write the data in EEPROM.
0 s⇒conversion index 0
0.00 s⇒conversion index -2 PKE=E19E Hex - Write single word in 4-14 Motor Speed High
0 ms⇒conversion index -3 Limit [Hz]
0.00 ms⇒conversion index -5 IND=0000 Hex
PWEhigh=0000 Hex
PWElow=03E8 Hex - Data value 1,000, corresponding to 100
Hz, see 7.4.12 Conversion.
130BA092.10
E19E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H
PKE IND PWE high PWE low
Illustration 7.12 Telegram

NOTE 7.6.2 Prerequisite Knowledge

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is a single word, and the
parameter command for write in EEPROM is “E.” Parameter The Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is designed to
number 4–14 is 19E in hexadecimal. communicate with any controller that supports the
interfaces defined in this document. It is assumed that the
reader has full knowledge of the capabilities and
130BA093.10
119E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H limitations of the controller.

7.6.3 Modbus RTU Overview
Illustration 7.13 Response from Master to Slave
Regardless of the type of physical communication

networks, the Modbus RTU Overview describes the process
7.5.2 Reading a Parameter Value a controller uses to request access to another device. This
process includes how the Modbus RTU responds to
Read the value in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time requests from another device, and how errors are detected
and reported. It also establishes a common format for the
PKE=1,155 Hex - Read parameter value in 3-41 Ramp 1 layout and contents of message fields.
Ramp Up Time
IND=0000 Hex
During communications over a Modbus RTU network, the
protocol determines: 7 7
PWEhigh=0000 Hex
PWElow=0000 Hex • How each controller learns its device address
• Recognises a message addressed to it

130BA094.10
1155 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H • Determines which actions to take
PKE IND PWE high PWE low • Extracts any data or other information contained
in the message
Illustration 7.14 Parameter Value
If a reply is required, the controller constructs the reply
message and sends it.
If the value in 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is 10 s, the Controllers communicate using a master-slave technique in
response from the slave to the master is: which only one device (the master) can initiate
transactions (called queries). The other devices (slaves)
respond by supplying the requested data to the master, or
130BA267.10
1155 H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H by responding to the the query.

The master can address individual slaves, or can initiate a
broadcast message to all slaves. Slaves return a message,
Illustration 7.15 Response from Slave to Master called a response, to queries that are addressed to them
individually. No responses are returned to broadcast
queries from the master. The Modbus RTU protocol
3E8 Hex corresponds to 1000 decimal. The conversion establishes the format for the master query by placing into
index for 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is -2. it the device (or broadcast) address, a function code
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is of the type Unsigned 32. defining the requested action, any data to send, and an
error-checking field. The slave response message is also
constructed using Modbus protocol. It contains fields
7.6 Modbus RTU Overview confirming the action taken, any data to return, and an
error-checking field. If an error occurs in receipt of the
7.6.1 Assumptions message, or if the slave is unable to perform the requested
action, the slave constructs an error message, and send it
Danfoss assumes that the installed controller supports the in response, or a time-out occurs.
interfaces in this document, and strictly observes all
requirements and limitations stipulated in the controller
and frequency converter.

7.6.4 Frequency Converter with Modbus

RTU
7.8 Modbus RTU Message Framing
The frequency converter communicates in Modbus RTU
Structure
format over the built-in RS-485 interface. Modbus RTU
7.8.1 Frequency Converter with Modbus
provides access to the control word and bus reference of
RTU
the frequency converter.
The controllers are set up to communicate on the Modbus

The control word allows the Modbus master to control network using RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode, with
several important functions of the frequency converter: each byte in a message containing two 4 bit hexadecimal
characters. The format for each byte is shown in Table 7.10.
• Start
• Stop of the frequency converter in various ways: Start Data byte Stop/ Stop
Coast stop bit parity
Quick stop
DC Brake stop
Normal (ramp) stop Table 7.9 Example Format
7 7 • Reset after a fault trip

Coding System 8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0–9, A-F. two
• Run at various preset speeds hexadecimal characters contained in each 8-
bit field of the message
• Run in reverse
Bits Per Byte 1 start bit
• Change the active set-up 8 data bits, least significant bit sent first
• Control the built-in relay of the frequency 1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no
converter parity
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity
The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is
Error Check Field Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC)
also possible to access the parameters, read their values,
and, where possible, write values to them, permitting a
Table 7.10 Bit Detail
range of control options, including controlling the setpoint
of the frequency converter when its internal PI controller is
used. 7.8.2 Modbus RTU Message Structure
The transmitting device places a Modbus RTU message

7.7 Network Configuration into a frame with a known beginning and ending point.
Receiving devices are able to begin at the start of the
7.7.1 Frequency Converter with Modbus message, read the address portion, determine which
RTU device is addressed (or all devices, if the message is
broadcast), and to recognise when the message is
To enable Modbus RTU on the frequency converter, set the completed. Partial messages are detected and errors set as
following parameters: a result. Characters for transmission must be in
hexadecimal 00 to FF format in each field. The frequency
Parameter Setting converter continuously monitors the network bus, also
8-30 Protocol Modbus RTU during ‘silent’ intervals. When the first field (the address
8-31 Address 1–247 field) is received, each frequency converter or device
8-32 Baud Rate 2400–115200 decodes it to determine which device is being addressed.
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Even parity, 1 stop bit (default) Modbus RTU messages addressed to zero are broadcast
messages. No response is permitted for broadcast
messages. A typical message frame is shown in Table 7.12.
Start Address Function Data CRC End

check
T1-T2-T3- 8 bits 8 bits Nx8 16 bits T1-T2-T3-
T4 bits T4
Table 7.11 Typical Modbus RTU Message Structure

7.8.3 Start/Stop Field 7.8.6 Data Field
Messages start with a silent period of at least 3.5 character The data field is constructed using sets of two hexadecimal
intervals, implemented as a multiple of character intervals digits, in the range of 00 to FF hexadecimal. These
at the selected network baud rate (shown as Start T1-T2- sequences are made up of one RTU character. The data
T3-T4). The first transmitted field is the device address. field of messages sent from a master to slave device
Following the last transmitted character, a similar period of contains more information, which the slave must use to do
at least 3.5 character intervals marks the end of the what is defined by the function code. This information can
message. A new message can begin after this period. The include items such as coil or register addresses, the
entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous quantity of items, and the count of actual data bytes in
stream. If a silent period of more than 1.5 character the field.
intervals occurs before completion of the frame, the
receiving device flushes the incomplete message and 7.8.7 CRC Check Field
assumes that the next byte is the address field of a new
message. Similarly, if a new message begins before 3.5 Messages include an error-checking field, operating based
character intervals after a previous message, the receiving on a Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) method. The CRC
device will consider it a continuation of the previous field checks the contents of the entire message. It is
message, causing a time-out (no response from the slave),
since the value in the final CRC field is not valid for the
combined messages.
applied regardless of any parity check method used for the
individual characters of the message. The transmitting 7 7
device calculates the CRC value then appends the CRC as
the last field in the message. The receiving device
7.8.4 Address Field recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message and
compares the calculated value to the actual value received
The address field of a message frame contains 8 bits. Valid in the CRC field. If the two values are unequal, a bus time-
slave device addresses are in the range of 0–247 decimal. out results. The error-checking field contains a 16-bit
The individual slave devices are assigned addresses in the binary value implemented as two 8-bit bytes. After error-
range of 1–247. (0 is reserved for broadcast mode, which checking, the low-order byte of the field is appended first,
all slaves recognise.) A master addresses a slave by placing followed by the high-order byte. The CRC high-order byte
the slave address in the address field of the message. is the last byte sent in the message.
When the slave sends its response, it places its own
address in this address field to let the master know which
slave is responding.
7.8.5 Function Field
The function field of a message frame contains 8 bits. Valid

codes are in the range of 1-FF. Function fields are used to
send messages between master and slave. When a
message is sent from a master to a slave device, the
function code field tells the slave what action to perform.
When the slave responds to the master, it uses the
function code field to indicate either a normal (error-free)
response, or that an error has occurred (called an
exception response). For a normal response, the slave
simply echoes the original function code. For an exception
response, the slave returns a code that is equivalent to the
original function code with its most significant bit set to
logic 1. In addition, the slave places a unique code into the
data field of the response message. This code tells the
master what error occurred, or the reason for the
exception. See 7.8.9 Function Codes Supported by Modbus
RTU.

7.8.8 Coil Register Addressing
In Modbus, all data are organised in coils and holding registers. Coils hold a single bit, whereas holding registers hold a 2
byte word (16 bits). All data addresses in Modbus messages are referenced to zero. The first occurrence of a data item is
addressed as item number zero. For example: The coil known as ‘coil 1’ in a programmable controller is addressed as coil
0000 in the data address field of a Modbus message. Coil 127 decimal is addressed as coil 007EHEX (126 decimal).
Holding register 40001 is addressed as register 0000 in the data address field of the message. The function code field
already specifies a ‘holding register’ operation. Therefore, the ‘4XXXX’ reference is implicit. Holding register 40108 is
addressed as register 006BHEX (107 decimal).
Coil number Description Signal direction

1–16 Frequency converter control word (see Table 7.14) Master to slave
17–32 Frequency converter speed or set-point reference Range 0x0–0xFFFF (-200% ...
Master to slave
~200%)
33–48 Frequency converter status word (see Table 7.14) Slave to master
49–64 Open loop mode: Frequency converter output frequency Closed loop mode:
Slave to master
Frequency converter feedback signal
7 7 65 Parameter write control (master to slave)

0 = Parameter changes are written to the RAM of the frequency converter
Master to slave
1 =Parameter changes are written to the RAM and EEPROM of the frequency
converter.
66-65536 Reserved
Table 7.12 Coils and Holding Registers

Coil 0 1 Coil 0 1
01 Preset reference LSB 33 Control not ready Control ready
02 Preset reference MSB 34 frequency converter not frequency converter ready
03 DC brake No DC brake ready
04 Coast stop No coast stop 35 Coasting stop Safety closed
05 Quick stop No quick stop 36 No alarm Alarm
06 Freeze freq. No freeze freq. 37 Not used Not used
07 Ramp stop Start 38 Not used Not used
08 No reset Reset 39 Not used Not used
09 No jog Jog 40 No warning Warning
10 Ramp 1 Ramp 2 41 Not at reference At reference
11 Data not valid Data valid 42 Hand mode Auto mode
12 Relay 1 off Relay 1 on 43 Out of freq. range In frequency range
13 Relay 2 off Relay 2 on 44 Stopped Running
14 Set up LSB 45 Not used Not used
15 Set up MSB 46 No voltage warning Voltage warning
16 No reversing Reversing 47 Not in current limit Current limit
48 No thermal warning Thermal warning
Table 7.13 Frequency Converter Control Word (FC Profile)
Table 7.14 Frequency Converter Status Word (FC Profile)

Register Number Description

00001-00006 Reserved
00007 Last error code from an FC data object interface
00008 Reserved
00009 Parameter index*
00010-00990 000 parameter group (parameters 001 through 099)
... ...
50000 Input data: frequency converter control word register (CTW).
50010 Input data: Bus reference register (REF).
... ...
50200 Output data: frequency converter status word register (STW).
50210 Output data: frequency converter main actual value register (MAV).
Table 7.15 Holding Registers

7 7
* Used to specify the index number used when accessing an indexed parameter.
7.8.9 Function Codes Supported by

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU supports use of the function codes in

Table 7.17 in the function field of a message.
Function Function code

Read coils 1 hex
Read holding registers 3 hex
Write single coil 5 hex
Write single register 6 hex
Write multiple coils F hex
Write multiple registers 10 hex
Get comm. event counter B hex
Report slave ID 11 hex
Table 7.16 Function Codes
Function Function Sub- Sub-function

code function
code
Diagnostics 8 1 Restart communication
2 Return diagnostic register
10 Clear counters and
diagnostic register
11 Return bus message count
12 Return bus communication
error count
13 Return bus exception error
count
14 Return slave message
count
Table 7.17 Function Codes

7.8.10 Database Error Codes
In the event of an error, the following error codes may appear in the data field of a response message. For a full
explanation of the structure of an exception (error) response, refer to 7.8.5 Function Field.
Error Code in data field

Database Error Code description
(decimal)
00 The parameter number does not exit
01 There is no write access to the parameter
02 The data value exceeds the parameter limits
03 The sub-index in use does not exit
04 The parameter is not of the array type
05 The data type does not match the parameter called
06 Only reset
07 Not changeable
11 No write access
17 Data change in the parameter called is not possible in the present mode
7 7 18
64
Other error
Invalid data address
65 Invalid message length
66 Invalid data length or value
67 Invalid function code
130 There is no bus access to the parameter called
131 Data change is not possible because factory set-up is selected
Table 7.18 Error Codes

7.9 How to Access Parameters

7.9.1 Parameter Handling 7.10 Examples
7.10.1 Read Coil Status (01 HEX)
The PNU (Parameter Number) is translated from the
register address contained in the Modbus read or write
Description
message. The parameter number is translated to Modbus
This function reads the ON/OFF status of discrete outputs
as (10xparameter number) DECIMAL.
(coils) in the frequency converter. Broadcast is never
supported for reads.
7.9.2 Storage of Data
Query
The Coil 65 decimal determines whether data written to The query message specifies the starting coil and quantity
the frequency converter is stored in EEPROM and RAM (coil of coils to read. Coil addresses start at zero.
65=1) or only in RAM (coil 65=0).
Example of a request to read coils 33–48 (Status Word)
7.9.3 IND from slave device 01.
The array index is set in holding register 9 and used when

accessing array parameters.
Field Name
Slave Address
Example (HEX)
01 (frequency converter address)
7 7
Function 01 (read coils)
7.9.4 Text Blocks Starting Address HI 00
Starting Address LO 20 (32 decimals) Coil 33
Parameters stored as text strings are accessed in the same No. of Points HI 00
way as the other parameters. The maximum text block size No. of Points LO 10 (16 decimals)
is 20 characters. If a read request for a parameter is for Error Check (CRC) -
more characters than the parameter stores, the response is
truncated. If the read request for a parameter is for fewer Table 7.19 Query
characters than the parameter stores, the response is space
filled. Response
The coil status in the response message is packed as one
7.9.5 Conversion Factor coil per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as: 1 = ON;
0 = OFF. The LSB of the first data byte contains the coil
The different attributes for each parameter can be seen in addressed in the query. The other coils follow toward the
the section on factory settings. Since a parameter value high-order end of this byte, and from ‘low order to high
can only be transferred as a whole number, a conversion order’ in subsequent bytes.
factor must be used to transfer decimals. If the returned coil quantity is not a multiple of eight, the
remaining bits in the final data byte are padded with zeros
(toward the high-order end of the byte). The Byte Count
7.9.6 Parameter Values field specifies the number of complete bytes of data.
Standard Data Types Field Name Example (HEX)

Standard data types are int16, int32, uint8, uint16, and Slave Address 01 (frequency converter address)
uint32. They are stored as 4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The Function 01 (read coils)
parameters are read using function 03HEX "Read Holding Byte Count 02 (2 bytes of data)
Registers." Parameters are written using the function 6HEX Data (Coils 40–33) 07
"Preset Single Register" for 1 register (16 bits), and the Data (Coils 48–41) 06 (STW=0607hex)
function 10HEX "Preset Multiple Registers" for 2 registers
Error Check (CRC) -
(32 bits). Readable sizes range from 1 register (16 bits) up
to 10 registers (20 characters). Table 7.20 Response
Non-standard Data Types NOTE

Non-standard data types are text strings and are stored as Coils and registers are addressed explicit with an off-set of
4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The parameters are read using -1 in Modbus.
function 03HEX "Read Holding Registers" and written using Coil 33 is addressed as Coil 32, for example.
function 10HEX "Preset Multiple Registers." Readable sizes
range from 1 register (2 characters) up to 10 registers (20
characters).

7.10.2 Force/Write Single Coil (05 HEX) Field Name Example (HEX)
Slave Address 01 (frequency converter address)
Description Function 0F (write multiple coils)
This function forces the coil to either ON or OFF. When Coil Address HI 00
broadcast, the function forces the same coil references in Coil Address LO 10 (coil address 17)
all attached slaves. Quantity of Coils HI 00
Query Quantity of Coils LO 10 (16 coils)
The query message specifies the coil 65 (parameter write Byte Count 02
control) to be forced. Coil addresses start at zero. Force Force Data HI 20
Data = 00 00HEX (OFF) or FF 00HEX (ON). (Coils 8–1)
Force Data LO 00 (ref. = 2000 hex)
Field Name Example (HEX) (Coils 16-9)
Slave Address 01 (frequency converter address) Error Check (CRC) -
Function 05 (write single coil)
Coil Address HI 00 Table 7.23 Query
Coil Address LO 40 (64 decimal) Coil 65
Force Data HI FF Response
The normal response returns the slave address, function
7 7 Force Data LO
Error Check (CRC)
00 (FF 00 = ON)
-
code, starting address, and quantity of coils forced.
Field Name Example (HEX)

Table 7.21 Query
Slave Address 01 (frequency converter address)
Response Function 0F (write multiple coils)
The normal response is an echo of the query, returned Coil Address HI 00
after the coil state has been forced. Coil Address LO 10 (coil address 17)
Quantity of Coils HI 00
Field Name Example (HEX) Quantity of Coils LO 10 (16 coils)
Slave Address 01 Error Check (CRC) -
Function 05
Force Data HI FF Table 7.24 Response
Force Data LO 00
Quantity of Coils HI 00 7.10.4 Read Holding Registers (03 HEX)
Quantity of Coils LO 01
Error Check (CRC) - Description
This function reads the contents of holding registers in the
Table 7.22 Response slave.
7.10.3 Force/Write Multiple Coils (0F HEX) Query

The query message specifies the starting register and
This function forces each coil in a sequence of coils to quantity of registers to read. Register addresses start at
either ON or OFF. When broadcast, the function forces the zero, that is, registers 1–4 are addressed as 0–3.
same coil references in all attached slaves.
Example: Read 3-03 Maximum Reference, register 03030.
The query message specifies the coils 17–32 (speed set-
point) to be forced. Field Name Example (HEX)
Slave Address 01
NOTE Function 03 (read holding registers)
Coil addresses start at zero, so coil 17 is addressed as 16, Starting Address HI 0B (Register address 3029)
for example. Starting Address LO D5 (Register address 3029)
No. of Points HI 00
No. of Points LO 02 - (Par. 3–03 is 32 bits long,
that is, 2 registers)
Error Check (CRC) -
Table 7.25 Query

Response Field Name Example (HEX)

The register data in the response message are packed as 2 Slave Address 01
bytes per register, with the binary contents right justified Function 06
within each byte. For each register, the first byte contains Register Address HI 03
the high-order bits and the second contains the low-order Register Address LO E7
bits. Preset Data HI 00
Preset Data LO 01
Example: Hex 0016E360 = 1.500.000 = 1,500 RPM. Error Check (CRC) -
Field Name Example (HEX) Table 7.28 Response

Slave Address 01
Function 03 7.11 Danfoss FC Control Profile
Byte Count 04
Data HI 00 7.11.1 Control Word According to FC
(Register 3030) Profile (8-10 Control Profile=FC
Data LO 16 profile)
(Register 3030)
Data HI
(Register 3031)
E3
Master-slave
7 7
130BA274.10
Data LO 60 CTW Speed ref.
(Register 3031)
Error Check -
(CRC) Bit
no.: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Table 7.26 Response Illustration 7.16 CW Master to Slave
7.10.5 Preset Single Register (06 HEX)

Bit Bit value=0 Bit value=1
00 Reference value external selection lsb
Description
01 Reference value external selection msb
This function presets a value into a single holding register.
02 DC brake Ramp
Query
03 Coasting No coasting
The query message specifies the register reference to be
04 Quick stop Ramp
preset. Register addresses start at zero, that is, register 1 is
05 Hold output frequency use ramp
addressed as 0.
06 Ramp stop Start
Example: Write to 1–00 Configuration Mode, register 1000. 07 No function Reset
08 No function Jog
Field Name Example (HEX) 09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
Slave Address 01 10 Data invalid Data valid
Function 06 11 No function Relay 01 active
Register Address HI 03 (Register address 999) 12 No function Relay 02 active
Register Address LO E7 (Register address 999) 13 Parameter set-up selection lsb
Preset Data HI 00 14 Parameter set-up selection msb
Preset Data LO 01 15 No function Reverse
Error Check (CRC) -
Table 7.27 Query

Explanation of the Control Bits
Response Bits 00/01

The normal response is an echo of the query, returned Bits 00 and 01 are used to choose between the four
after the register contents have been passed. reference values, which are pre-programmed in 3-10 Preset
Reference according to Table 7.31.

Programmed ref. Parameter Bit 01 Bit 00 Bit 06, Ramp stop/start

value Bit 06=’0’: Causes a stop and makes the motor speed ramp
1 [0] 3-10 Preset 0 0 down to stop via the selected ramp down parameter.
Reference Bit 06=’1’: Permits the frequency converter to start the
2 [1] 3-10 Preset 0 1 motor, if the other starting conditions are met.
Reference
3 [2] 3-10 Preset 1 0 Make a selection in 8-53 Start Select to define how Bit 06
Reference Ramp stop/start gates with the corresponding function on
4 [3] 3-10 Preset 1 1 a digital input.
Reference
Bit 07, Reset:
Table 7.29 Control Bits
Bit 07=’0’: No reset.
Bit 07=’1’: Resets a trip. Reset is activated on the leading
NOTE edge of the signal, that is, when changing from logic ’0’ to
Make a selection in 8-56 Preset Reference Select to define logic ’1’.
how Bit 00/01 gates with the corresponding function on
the digital inputs. Bit 08, Jog
7 7 Bit 02, DC brake

Bit 08=’1’: The output frequency depends on3-19 Jog Speed
[RPM].
Bit 02=’0’ leads to DC braking and stop. Set braking
current and duration in 2-01 DC Brake Current and 2-02 DC Bit 09, Selection of ramp 1/2
Braking Time. Bit 09="0": Ramp 1 is active (3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time to
Bit 02=’1’ leads to ramping. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time).
Bit 09="1": Ramp 2 (3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time to
Bit 03, Coasting 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) is active.
Bit 03=’0’: The frequency converter immediately "lets go"
of the motor (the output transistors are "shut off") and it Bit 10, Data not valid/Data valid
coasts to a standstill. Tell the frequency converter whether to use or ignore the
Bit 03=’1’: The frequency converter starts the motor if the control word. Bit 10=’0’: The control word is ignored.
other starting conditions are met. Bit 10=’1’: The control word is used. This function is
relevant because the telegram always contains the control
Make a selection in 8-50 Coasting Select to define how Bit word, regardless of the telegram type. Thus, it is possible
03 gates with the corresponding function on a digital to turn off the control word if not in use when updating or
input. reading parameters.
Bit 04, Quick stop Bit 11, Relay 01

Bit 04=’0’: Makes the motor speed ramp down to stop (set Bit 11="0": Relay not activated.
in 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time). Bit 11="1": Relay 01 activated if Control word bit 11 is
chosen in 5-40 Function Relay.
Bit 05, Hold output frequency
Bit 05=’0’: The present output frequency (in Hz) freezes. Bit 12, Relay 04
Change the frozen output frequency only with the digital Bit 12="0": Relay 04 is not activated.
inputs (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33 Bit 12="1": Relay 04 is activated if Control word bit 12 is
Digital Input) programmed to Speed up and Slow down. chosen in 5-40 Function Relay.
NOTE
If freeze output is active, only the following conditions can
stop the frequency converter:
• Bit 03 Coasting stop
• Bit 02 DC braking
• Digital input (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) programmed to DC
braking, Coasting stop, or Reset and coasting stop.

Bit 13/14, Selection of set-up Bit Bit=0 Bit=1

Use bits 13 and 14 to choose from the four menu set-ups 00 Control not ready Control ready
according to Table 7.32: 01 Drive not ready Drive ready
02 Coasting Enable
Set-up Bit 14 Bit 13 03 No error Trip
1 0 0 04 No error Error (no trip)
2 0 1 05 Reserved -
3 1 0 06 No error Triplock
4 1 1 07 No warning Warning
08 Speed≠reference Speed=reference
Table 7.30 Selection of Set-up
09 Local operation Bus control
10 Out of frequency limit Frequency limit OK
The function is only possible when Multi Set-Ups is selected
11 No operation In operation
in 0-10 Active Set-up.
12 Drive OK Stopped, auto start
13 Voltage OK Voltage exceeded
Make a selection in 8-55 Set-up Select to define how Bit
14 Torque OK Torque exceeded
13/14 gates with the corresponding function on the digital
15 Timer OK Timer exceeded
inputs.
7 7
Bit 15 Reverse Explanation of the Status Bits
Bit 15=’0’: No reversing. Bit 00, Control not ready/ready
Bit 15=’1’: Reversing. In the default setting, reversing is set Bit 00=’0’: The frequency converter trips.
to digital in 8-54 Reversing Select. Bit 15 causes reversing Bit 00=’1’: The frequency converter controls are ready but
only when Ser. communication, Logic, or Logic and is the power component does not necessarily receive any
selected. power supply (in case of external 24 V supply to controls).
Bit 01, Drive ready:

7.11.2 Status Word According to FC Profile
Bit 01=’1’: The frequency converter is ready for operation
(STW) (8-10 Control Profile = FC
but the coasting command is active via the digital inputs
profile)
or via serial communication.
Slave-master Bit 02, Coasting stop

130BA273.10
Bit 02=’0’: The frequency converter releases the motor.

STW Output freq. Bit 02=’1’: The frequency converter starts the motor with a
start command.
Bit
no.: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 03, No error/trip
Illustration 7.17 STW Slave to Master Bit 03=’0’: The frequency converter is not in fault mode.
Bit 03=’1’: The frequency converter trips. To re-establish
operation, enter [Reset].
Bit 04, No error/error (no trip)

Bit 04=’0’: The frequency converter is not in fault mode.
Bit 04=“1”: The frequency converter shows an error but
does not trip.
Bit 05, Not used

Bit 05 is not used in the status word.
Bit 06, No error/triplock

Bit 06=’0’: The frequency converter is not in fault mode.
Bit 06=“1”: The frequency converter is tripped and locked.

Bit 07, No warning/warning Bit 15, Timer OK/limit exceeded

Bit 07=’0’: There are no warnings. Bit 15=’0’: The timers for motor thermal protection and
Bit 07=’1’: A warning has occurred. thermal protection are not exceeded 100%.
Bit 15=’1’: One of the timers exceeds 100%.
Bit 08, Speed≠ reference/speed=reference
Bit 08=’0’: The motor is running but the present speed is If the connection between the Interbus option and the
different from the preset speed reference. It could be the frequency converter is lost, or an internal communication
case when the speed ramps up/down during start/stop. problem has occurred, all bits in the STW are set to ’0.'
Bit 08=’1’: The motor speed matches the preset speed
reference.
Bit 09, Local operation/bus control

Bit 09=’0’: [Stop/Reset] is activated on the control unit or
Local control in 3-13 Reference Site is selected. The
frequency converter cannot be controlled via serial
communication.
Bit 09=’1’ It is possible to control the frequency converter
via the fieldbus/serial communication.
7 7
Bit 10, Out of frequency limit
Bit 10=’0’: The output frequency has reached the value in
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM].
Bit 10="1": The output frequency is within the defined
limits.
Bit 11, No operation/in operation

Bit 11=’0’: The motor is not running.
Bit 11=’1’: The frequency converter has a start signal or the
output frequency is greater than 0 Hz.
Bit 12, Drive OK/stopped, autostart

Bit 12=’0’: There is no temporary over temperature on the
inverter.
Bit 12=’1’: The inverter stops because of over temperature
but the unit does not trip and resumes operation once the
over temperature stops.
Bit 13, Voltage OK/limit exceeded

Bit 13=’0’: There are no voltage warnings.
Bit 13=’1’: The DC voltage in the intermediate circuit is too
low or too high.
Bit 14, Torque OK/limit exceeded

Bit 14=’0’: The motor current is lower than the torque limit
selected in 4-18 Current Limit.
Bit 14=’1’: The torque limit in 4-18 Current Limit is
exceeded.

7.11.3 Bus Speed Reference Value
Speed reference value is transmitted to the frequency converter in a relative value in %. The value is transmitted in the form
of a 16-bit word; in integers (0–32767) the value 16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%. Negative figures are formatted
with 2’s complement. The Actual Output frequency (MAV) is scaled in the same way as the bus reference.
Master-slave
130BA276.10
16bit
CTW Speed ref.
Slave-master
Actual output
STW
freq.
Illustration 7.18 Bus Speed Reference Value
The reference and MAV are scaled as showed in Illustration 7.19.
-100% 0% 100%
7 7
130BA277.10
(C000hex) (0hex) (4000hex)
Par.3-00 set to
Reverse Forward
(1) -max- +max
Par.3-03 0 Par.3-03
Max reference Max reference
0% 100%
(0hex) (4000hex)
Par.3-00 set to
Forward
(0) min-max
Par.3-02 Par.3-03
Min reference Max reference

Illustration 7.19 Reference and MAV

Troubleshooting VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Status Messages

A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a code on
the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the motor can
continue. Warning messages are sometimes critical, but are not always so.
In case of an alarm, the frequency converter has tripped. Alarms must be reset to restart operation once their cause has
been rectified.
There are four ways to restart:
1. By pressing [Reset].
2. Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.
3. Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
4. By resetting automatically using the [Auto Reset] function, which is a default setting for VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
Drive. See 14-20 Reset Mode in VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Programming Guide
8 8
NOTE
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], [Auto On] or [Hand On] must be pressed to restart the motor.
If an alarm cannot be reset, the possible reason is that its cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked (see also
Table 8.1).
Alarms that are trip-locked offer more protection, means that the mains supply must be switched off before the alarm can
be reset. After being switched back on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can be reset once the cause has
been rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode
NOTE
Automatic wake-up is possible!
If a warning and alarm are marked against a code in Table 8.1, this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm, or it
can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is displayed for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on coasting, and the
alarm and warning flash on the frequency converter. Once the problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
flashing.
No. Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Reference

1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function
3 No motor (X) 1-80 Function at Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12 Function at
Mains Imbalance
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC over voltage X X


8 DC under voltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR over temperature (X) (X) 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over Current X X X
14 Earth fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04 Control Word
Timeout Function
23 Internal Fan Fault X
24 External Fan Fault X 14-53 Fan Monitor
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28
29
Brake check
Drive over temperature
(X)
X
(X)
X X
2-15 Brake Check
8 8
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
33 Inrush fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Out of frequency range X X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase Imbalance X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 (X) 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi
Out (MCB 101)
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 (X) 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi
Out (MCB 101)
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X


58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External Interlock X
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Over-temperature X X X
66 Heat sink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
68 Safe Stop Activated X1)
69 Pwr. Card Temp (E- and F-frames only) X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X1)
72 Dangerous Failure X1)
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart
76 Power Unit Setup X
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialised to Default Value X
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X
92 NoFlow X X 22-2* No-Flow
8 8 Detection
93 Dry Pump X X 22-2* No-Flow
Detection
94 End of Curve X X 22-5* End of Curve
95 Broken Belt X X 22-6* Broken Belt
Detection
96 Start Delayed X 22-7* Short Cycle
Protection
97 Stop Delayed X 22-7* Short Cycle
Protection
98 Clock Fault X 0-7* Clock Settings
104 Mixing Fan Fault (D-frame only) X X 14-53 Fan Monitor
220 Overload Trip X
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temp X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card supply X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare part X
251 New Type Code X X
Table 8.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip coasts the motor and can be reset by pressing [Reset] or make a
reset by a digital input in parameter group 5–1* Digital Inputs [1] Reset ). The origin event that caused an alarm cannot
damage the frequency converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs, that can
damage the frequency converter or connected parts. A Trip Lock situation can only be reset by a power cycling.

Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red
Table 8.2 LED Indication
Alarm Word and Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Warning Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check Brake Check Ramping
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
2 00000004 4 Earth Fault Earth Fault Start CW/CCW
3 00000008 8 Ctrl. Card Temp Ctrl. Card Temp Slow Down
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
5 00000020 32 Over Current Over Current Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC under Volt DC under Volt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC over Volt DC over Volt Brake Check OK
12
13
00001000
00002000
4096
8192
Short Circuit
Inrush Fault
DC Voltage Low
DC Voltage High
Braking Max
Braking 8 8
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss Mains ph. Loss Out of Speed Range
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error Live Zero Error
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault 10V Low
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Brake Overload
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss Brake Resistor
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault Fieldbus Fault
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply Low 24V Supply Low
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure Mains Failure
25 02000000 33554432 1.8V Supply Low Current Limit
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialised Unused
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop Unused
Table 8.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnosis. See also 16-90 Alarm Word, 16-92 Warning Word and 16-94 Ext. Status Word.

Index VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
Index Cable-length And Cross-section......................................... 114, 136

Cabling......................................................................................... 114, 134
Cascade Controller Option.................................................. 61, 60, 61
A
Abbreviations........................................................................................... 8 CE Conformity And Labelling........................................................... 13
Access To Control Terminals.......................................................... 105 Coasting................................................................................... 181, 8, 180
Accessory Bag Control Terminals................................................... 78 Conducted Emission........................................................................... 32
Acoustic Noise....................................................................................... 51 Connection To Mains........................................................................ 101
Aggressive Environments.................................................................. 14 Constant Torque Applications (CT Mode)................................... 53
Air Humidity........................................................................................... 14 Control
Board VLT® AQUA DriveFC 202................................................... 78
Airflow...................................................................................................... 96
Cable Length................................................................................... 107
Alarm/Warning Code List................................................................ 186 Cable Terminals.............................................................................. 105
Alarms And Warnings....................................................................... 184 Cables........................................................... 151, 108, 112, 107, 110
Card Performance............................................................................ 50
Aluminum Conductors..................................................................... 102 Card, 10 V DC Output..................................................................... 50
AMA........................................................................................................ 157 Card, 24 V DC Output..................................................................... 49
Card, RS-485 Serial Communication:........................................ 48
Analog Card, USB Serial Communication............................................... 50
I/O Option MCB 109........................................................................ 59 Characteristics................................................................................... 50
I/O Selection...................................................................................... 59 Structure Closed Loop.................................................................... 23
Inputs............................................................................................... 9, 48 Structure Open Loop...................................................................... 22
Output.................................................................................................. 48 Terminals.......................................................................................... 105
Outputs - Terminal X30/5+8........................................................ 57 Word................................................................................................... 179
Voltage Inputs - Terminal X30/10-12........................................ 57
Cooling.............................................................................................. 53, 96
Approvals................................................................................................... 8
Copyright, Limitation Of Liability And Revision Rights............. 7
Automatic
Adaptations To Ensure Performance........................................ 54 Cos Φ Compensation.......................................................................... 17
Motor Adaptation.......................................................................... 157
Motor Adaptation (AMA)............................................................ 148
D
Available Literature................................................................................ 7 Database Error Codes....................................................................... 176
DC Brake................................................................................................ 180
B De-coupling Plate.............................................................................. 101
Back
Channel Cooling Kits...................................................................... 64 Definitions................................................................................................. 8
Cooling................................................................................................ 96 Derating
Basic For Low Air Pressure....................................................................... 52
Cascade Controller.......................................................................... 61 For Running At Low Speed........................................................... 53
Wiring Example.............................................................................. 106 DeviceNet................................................................................................ 77
Battery Back-up Of Clock Function................................................ 59 Digital
Better Control........................................................................................ 16 Inputs................................................................................................... 49
Inputs - Terminal X30/1-4............................................................. 57
Brake Output.................................................................................................. 49
Function.............................................................................................. 36 Outputs - Terminal X30/5-7.......................................................... 57
Power............................................................................................... 9, 36
Resistor................................................................................................ 36 DISCHARGE TIME!................................................................................. 12
Resistor Cabling................................................................................ 37 Disposal Instruction............................................................................. 13
Resistors....................................................................................... 63, 62
Drive Configurator............................................................................... 72
Branch Circuit Protection................................................................ 103
DU/dt Filters.................................................................................... 64, 85
Building Management System........................................................ 59
Duct Cooling.......................................................................................... 96
C E
Cable
Earth
Clamp................................................................................................. 153
Connection...................................................................................... 101
Clamps............................................................................................... 151
Leakage Current...................................................................... 151, 35
Length And Cross-section.......................................................... 102
Lengths And Cross Sections......................................................... 48

Earthing Hold Output Frequency................................................................... 180

Earthing............................................................................................. 153
How To Connect A PC To The Unit.............................................. 150
Of Screened/Armoured Control Cables................................ 153
Efficiency.................................................................................................. 51
Electrical
I
Installation.............................................................................. 102, 107 I/Os For Set Point Inputs.................................................................... 59
Installation - EMC Precautions.................................................. 151 IEC Emergency Stop With Pilz Safety Relay................................. 70
EMC Immunity Requirements.................................................................... 33
Directive 2004/108/EC................................................................... 14
Index (IND)............................................................................................ 169
Precautions...................................................................................... 165
Test Results......................................................................................... 32 Input
Filters.................................................................................................... 63
Emission Requirements...................................................................... 31
Polarity Of Control Terminals.................................................... 112
Energy Savings............................................................................... 16, 15
Installation
Equalising Cable................................................................................. 154 At High Altitudes.............................................................................. 12
Ethernet IP............................................................................................... 78 Of Back Channel Cooling Kit In Rittal........................................ 64
Of Input Plate Options................................................................... 68
Example Of Closed Loop PID Control............................................ 27 Of Mains Shield For Frequency Converters............................ 68
Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101 And Advanced Cas- On Pedestal........................................................................................ 66
cade Controller, MCO 102...... 60 Insulation Resistance Monitor (IRM).............................................. 70
External Intermediate Circuit............................................................... 37, 51, 52
24 V DC Supply................................................................................. 59
Fan Power Supply.......................................................................... 144
Temperature Monitoring.............................................................. 71 J
Extreme Running Conditions........................................................... 37 Jog....................................................................................................... 8, 180
F L
FC Profile............................................................................................... 179 Laws Of Proportionality...................................................................... 15
Final Set-Up And Test....................................................................... 147 LCP
LCP............................................................................................. 8, 10, 63
Fixed Speed Pump............................................................................... 61
101......................................................................................................... 77
Follower Drive........................................................................................ 61 102......................................................................................................... 77
Frame Size F Options........................................................................... 69 Cable..................................................................................................... 77
Kit........................................................................................................... 77
Freeze Output.......................................................................................... 8
Lead Pump Alternation Wiring Diagram................................... 163
Frequency Converter With Modbus RTU................................... 172
Leakage Current.................................................................................... 35
Function Codes Supported By Modbus RTU............................ 175
Lifting........................................................................................................ 92
Fuses....................................................................................................... 103
Load Drive Settings:.......................................................................... 150
Fusing........................................................................................... 114, 134
Local (Hand On) And Remote (Auto On) Control...................... 22
G
General
M
Aspects Of EMC Emissions............................................................ 30 Mains
Aspects Of Harmonics Emission................................................. 32 Plug Connector.............................................................................. 101
Considerations........................................................................... 94, 95 Supply.................................................................................................. 11
Description......................................................................................... 61 Supply (L1, L2, L3)............................................................................ 47
Gland/Conduit Manual
Entry - IP21 (NEMA 1) And IP54 (NEMA12).............................. 98 Motor Starters................................................................................... 70
Entry, 12-Pulse - IP21 (NEMA 1) And IP54 (NEMA12).......... 99 PID Adjustment................................................................................ 29
Master Drive........................................................................................... 61
MCA
H 101......................................................................................................... 77
Harmonic Filters.................................................................................... 78 104......................................................................................................... 77
Harmonics 108......................................................................................................... 77
Emission Requirements................................................................. 33
Test Results (Emission)................................................................... 33
High Voltage Test............................................................................... 151

MCB
101......................................................................................................... 77
105......................................................................................................... 77
P
105 Option.......................................................................................... 58 Parameter Values............................................................................... 177
107......................................................................................................... 77 Pay Back Period..................................................................................... 16
109......................................................................................................... 77
PC Software Tools.............................................................................. 150
114......................................................................................................... 77
Peak Voltage On Motor...................................................................... 52
MCF 103................................................................................................... 77
PELV - Protective Extra Low Voltage.............................................. 34
MCO
101......................................................................................................... 77 Planning The Installation Site.......................................................... 91
102......................................................................................................... 77 PLC........................................................................................................... 154
MCT Potentiometer Reference................................................................ 157
10......................................................................................................... 150
10 Set-up Software....................................................................... 150 Power
31......................................................................................................... 151 Connections.................................................................................... 114
Connections 12-Pulse Drives..................................................... 134
Mechanical Factor.................................................................................................... 11
Dimensions................................................................................. 88, 87 Factor Correction............................................................................. 17
Installation.......................................................................................... 87
Mounting............................................................................................ 90 Preparing Gland Plates For Cables............................................... 100
Moment Of Inertia................................................................................ 37 Principle Diagram................................................................................. 59
Motor Profibus
Cable Connection.......................................................................... 101 Profibus................................................................................................ 77
Cables....................................................................................... 151, 102 DP-V1................................................................................................. 150
Name Plate....................................................................................... 147 D-Sub 9................................................................................................ 77
Output.................................................................................................. 47 Programming Order............................................................................ 28
Parameters....................................................................................... 157
Protection
Phases.................................................................................................. 37
Protection.................................................................................... 14, 34
Protection........................................................................................... 47
And Features...................................................................................... 47
Thermal Protection................................................................ 182, 37
Voltage................................................................................................. 52 Protocol Overview............................................................................. 166
Multi-zone Control............................................................................... 59 Pt1000 Temperature Sensor............................................................. 59
Public Supply Network....................................................................... 33
N Pulse
Name Plate Data................................................................................. 147 Inputs................................................................................................... 49
Start/Stop......................................................................................... 156
NAMUR..................................................................................................... 70
Pump Staging With Lead Pump Alternation............................ 161
Network Connection......................................................................... 166
Ni1000 Temperature Sensor............................................................. 59
R
Radiated Emission................................................................................ 32
O Rated Motor Speed................................................................................ 8
Open Loop Mode.................................................................................. 61
RCD
Options And Accessories................................................................... 56 RCD........................................................................................................ 10
Ordering (Residual Current Device)............................................................. 70
Numbers.............................................................................................. 72 Read Holding Registers (03 HEX).................................................. 178
Numbers: Advanced Harmonic Filters..................................... 78
Numbers: Brake Resistors.............................................................. 86 Real-time Clock (RTC).......................................................................... 60
Numbers: Options And Accessories.......................................... 77 Receiving The Frequency Converter............................................. 92
Numbers: Sine-Wave Filter Modules, 380–690 V AC............. 3
Reference Handling............................................................................. 26
Output
Relay
Filters.................................................................................................... 63
Option MCB 105............................................................................... 58
Performance (U, V, W)..................................................................... 47
Outputs................................................................................................ 49
Outputs For Actuators........................................................................ 59
Residual Current Device.................................................................. 155
Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit For Rittal................................ 66
Rise Time.................................................................................................. 52
Over-current Protection.................................................................. 103
RS-485
RS-485................................................................................................ 165
Bus Connection.............................................................................. 149

The
Clear Advantage - Energy Savings............................................. 15
S EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)....................................................... 13
Safe Low-voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)......................................... 13
Stop + Pilz Relay............................................................................... 70 Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)............................................. 13
Stop Commissioning Test........................................................... 149
Stop Installation............................................................................. 148 Thermistor............................................................................................... 10
Stop Operation (optional)............................................................. 39 Torque
Safety Torque............................................................................................... 113
Earth Connection........................................................................... 151 Characteristics................................................................................... 47
Note...................................................................................................... 12 Transmitter/sensor Inputs................................................................. 59
Regulations........................................................................................ 12
Requirements Of Mechanical Installation............................... 91 Tuning The Closed Loop Controller............................................... 29
Save Drive Settings:........................................................................... 150 Type Code String.................................................................................. 73
Screened............................................................................................... 108
Screened/armoured.......................................................................... 112 U
Unpacking............................................................................................... 92
Screening Of Cables....................................................... 102, 114, 135
Unsuccessful AMA............................................................................. 148
Serial
Communication...................................................................... 50, 154 USB
Communication Port......................................................................... 9 Cable..................................................................................................... 77
Connection...................................................................................... 105
Set Speed Limit And Ramp Time.................................................. 148
Use Of EMC-Correct Cables............................................................ 153
Short Circuit Protection................................................................... 103
Side-by-side Installation..................................................................... 90
Sine-wave
V
Filter................................................................................. 101, 114, 136 Variable
Filters.................................................................................................... 64 (Quadratic) Torque Applications (VT)....................................... 53
Control Of Flow And Pressure..................................................... 16
Smart Logic Control.......................................................................... 157 Speed Pumps..................................................................................... 61
Soft-starter.............................................................................................. 17 Varying Flow Over One Year............................................................. 16
Software Vibration And Shock............................................................................ 15
Version And Approvals.................................................................. 13
Versions............................................................................................... 78 Voltage Level.......................................................................................... 49
Space VVCplus.................................................................................................... 10
Space.................................................................................................... 94
Heaters And Thermostat............................................................... 69
W
Star/delta Starter.................................................................................. 17 Warning Against Unintended Start................................................ 12
Start/Stop.............................................................................................. 156 What
Status Word.......................................................................................... 181 Is CE Conformity And Labelling?................................................ 13
Is Covered........................................................................................... 13
Successful AMA................................................................................... 148
Wire Access............................................................................................. 94
Surroundings......................................................................................... 50
Switches S201, S202 And S801...................................................... 112
Switching Frequency..................................................... 102, 114, 136
Symbols...................................................................................................... 7
System Status And Operation....................................................... 161
T
Telegram Length (LGE).................................................................... 167
Terminal
37........................................................................................................... 39
Blocks................................................................................................... 77
Locations.......................................................................................... 125

www.danfoss.com/drives
130R0279 MG20Z102 Rev. 2012-12-21
*MG20Z102*

VFD - VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 - Design Guide - Doc - MG20Z102

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VFD - VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 - Design Guide - Doc - MG20Z102

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VFD - VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 - Design Guide - Doc - MG20Z102

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

1 How to Read this Design Guide 7

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

3.1.1 Mains Supply 3x380-480 V AC 40

2 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

3.7.6.7 Heat Sink Access Panel 69

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

5.3.8 Fuse Specifications 103

6 Application Examples 156

4 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

6.1.2 Pulse Start/Stop 156

7 RS-485 Installation and Set-up 165

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

7.6.4 Frequency Converter with Modbus RTU 172

6 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

1 How to Read this Design Guide 1 1

- VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202, 0.25-90 kW, Operating

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

8 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

ηVLT Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA 1 1

Start-disable command Brake Resistor

Pulse Reference Relay Outputs

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

1 1 LCP Smart Logic Control (SLC)

- Graphical LCP 102 (GLCP)

msb Trip Locked

10 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

1.1.5 Power Factor 1 1

The power factor for 3-phase control:

The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency

In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

12 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

2.1.2 Disposal Instruction EMC is short for electromagnetic compatibility. The

1. The frequency converter is sold directly to the

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 13

2.4 Air Humidity

CAUTION Excessive dust particle levels are often found on instal-

14 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

The frequency converter has been tested according to the 80

The frequency converter complies with requirements that 40

• IEC/EN 60068-2-64: Vibration, broad-band random

2.7 Frequency Converter Benefits 100

2.7.1 Why use a Frequency Converter for INPUT POWER % 80

A frequency converter takes advantage of the fact that 40

The clear advantage of using a frequency converter for

120 RPM. The consumption of electricity, however, is 50%

MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark 15

0 100 200 300 400 (m3 /h)

Table 2.5 Energy Savings - Calculation

2.7.5 Better Control

If a frequency converter is used for controlling the flow or

16 MG20Z102 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark

2.7.6 Cos φ Compensation

Generally speaking, the frequency converter has a cos φ of

2.7.7 Star/delta Starter or Soft-starter not

When larger motors are started, it is necessary in many

As shown in Illustration 2.6, a frequency converter does not

1 VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202